The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutItem 7 - 2018 Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS & ENGINEERING STANDARDS MAY 2018 PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT ENGINEERING DIVISION 919 Palm Street San Luis Obispo, CA 93401 (805) 781-7200 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS MAY 2018 APPROVED BY THE CITY ENGINEER: Approved on: May 15, 2018 Effective: May 31, 2018 MATT HORN CITY ENGINEER RCE C63611 ADOPTED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF SAN LUIS OBISPO BY RESOLUTION NO. XXXXX (2018 SERIES) PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT ENGINEERING DIVISION 919 Palm Street San Luis Obispo, CA 93401 (805) 781-7200 ENGINEERING STANDARDS MAY 2018 APPROVED BY THE CITY ENGINEER: Approved on: May 15, 2018 Effective: June XXX, 2018 MATT HORN CITY ENGINEER RCE C63611 ADOPTED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF SAN LUIS OBISPO BY RESOLUTION NO. XXXXX (2018 SERIES) PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT ENGINEERING DIVISION 919 Palm Street San Luis Obispo, CA 93401 (805) 781-7200 CITY ENGINEERING STANDARDS NO. May 2018 Edition 1000 - GENERAL UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA ........................................................................................... 1010 2000 - PARKING & DRIVEWAY STANDARDS DRIVEWAYS DRIVEWAY RAMP - STANDARD ...................................................................................... 2110 DRIVEWAY RAMP - RIGHT-OF-WAYS LESS THAN 10’ .................................................. 2111 DRIVEWAY RAMP - DETACHED SIDEWALK, STANDARD ............................................. 2115 DRIVEWAY RAMP - DETACHED SIDEWALK, ROWs LESS THAN 10’ ........................... 2116 DRIVEWAY RAMP - SIZE & LOCATION ........................................................................... 2120 STANDARD DRIVEWAY - UPWARD & DOWNWARD ...................................................... 2130 UPWARD & DOWNWARD DRIVEWAYS - MAXIMUM RISE & DESCENT (Residential) . 2140 PARKING LOTS PAVEMENT DESIGN .......................................................................................................... 2210 OFF-STREET PARKING STANDARDS ............................................................................. 2220 PARKING BAY DIMENSIONS - COMPACT CARS ........................................................... 2230 PARKING BAY DIMENSIONS - AVERAGE CARS ............................................................ 2240 PARKING LOT STRIPING .................................................................................................. 2250 WHEEL STOP ..................................................................................................................... 2260 3000 - DRAINAGE CATCH BASINS CATCH BASIN - SIDE OPENING ....................................................................................... 3350 CATCH BASIN - SIDE OPENING WITH SUMP ................................................................. 3355 CATCH BASIN - EXTENDED SIDE OPENING .................................................................. 3360 UNDERDRAINS SIDEWALK UNDERDRAIN - CONCRETE ......................................................................... 3410 SIDEWALK UNDERDRAIN - WITH PIPES ........................................................................ 3415 SIDEWALK UNDERDRAIN - WITH COVER PLATES ....................................................... 3420 STORM DRAIN MANHOLES STORM DRAIN MANHOLE - 36” PIPE & LARGER ........................................................... 3510 STORM DRAIN MANHOLE - 18” to 36” PIPE .................................................................... 3520 PRECAST STORM DRAIN MANHOLE - UP TO 3’ O.D. PIPE SIZE ................................. 3530 STORM DRAIN CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................... 3540 4000 - CURB, GUTTER & SIDEWALK CURB & GUTTER CURB .................................................................................................................................. 4020 CURB & GUTTER ............................................................................................................... 4030 SIDEWALK SIDEWALK - INTEGRAL & DETACHED ............................................................................ 4110 SIDEWALK TRANSITIONS ................................................................................................ 4120 CONCRETE PAVER SIDEWALK – RAILROAD DISTRICT ............................................... 4150 CITY ENGINEERING STANDARDS NO. MISSION STYLE MISSION STYLE SIDEWALK ............................................................................................. 4220 MISSION STYLE RAILING - HANDRAIL & GUARDRAIL .................................................. 4240 CROSS GUTTERS CROSS GUTTER ................................................................................................................ 4310 CURB RAMPS CURB RAMP - CORNERS & MID-BLOCK ......................................................................... 4440 MISCELLANEOUS CUTTING CONCRETE ....................................................................................................... 4910 CONCRETE BUS TURNOUT ............................................................................................. 4920 BUS STOP .......................................................................................................................... 4930 RAISED COBBLESTONE MEDIAN .................................................................................... 4940 5000 - RETAINING WALLS RETAINING WALL DRAINAGE .......................................................................................... 5020 SHORT RETAINING WALLS .............................................................................................. 5030 6000 - UTILITIES UTILITIES LOCATION ........................................................................................................ 6010 TRENCH DETAIL #1 - PAVED OR UNPAVED STREETS ................................................ 6020 TRENCH DETAIL #2 - UNPAVED NON-TRAFFIC AREAS ............................................... 6030 TRENCH DETAIL #3 - CONDUIT TRENCH ....................................................................... 6035 UTILITY COVER - GRADE ADJUSTMENT & P.C.C. COLLAR ......................................... 6040 UTILITY PIPELINE - ABANDONMENT .............................................................................. 6050 WATER - SEWER SEPARATION CRITERIA - TEXT ...................................................................................... 6110 (2pp) SEPARATION CRITERIA - DETAILS ................................................................................. 6140 WATER SERVICES WATER SERVICES - NEW & REPLACEMENTS .............................................................. 6210 WATER SERVICE - CONNECTIONS ................................................................................ 6220 WELL METERING .............................................................................................................. 6240 WATER METER - WITH UNMETERED BYPASS, 3” & LARGER ..................................... 6250 MANIFOLD - MULTIPLE WATER SERVICES ................................................................... 6260 6000 - UTILITIES (CONTINUED) WATER MAINS FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY ............................................................................................. 6310 RECYCLED WATER HYDRANT ASSEMBLY ................................................................... 6315 VALVE TO FITTING RESTRAINT ...................................................................................... 6320 WATERLINE TIE-IN ............................................................................................................ 6330 WATER VALVE & WELL .................................................................................................... 6340 BLOW-OFF ASSEMBLY ..................................................................................................... 6350 AIR/VAC RELEASE VALVE ASSEMBLY – 1” & 2” ............................................................ 6360 CITY ENGINEERING STANDARDS NO. WATER MISCELLANEOUS BACKFLOW PREVENTER - 2” to 10” ................................................................................ 6420 FIRE SPRINKLER VALVE & WELL - 2” ............................................................................. 6520 NEW FIRE SERVICE - 4” ................................................................................................... 6530 R P BACKFLOW PREVENTER - ¾” to 10” ........................................................................ 6550 FIRE MAIN - BUILDING CONNECTION ............................................................................ 6590 SEWER MANHOLES SEWER MANHOLE ............................................................................................................ 6610 SEWER DROP MANHOLE ................................................................................................. 6620 SEWER MANHOLE SAND TRAP ...................................................................................... 6650 SEWER MAINS SEWER CLEANOUT & WELL ............................................................................................ 6710 SEWER SERVICES SEWER LATERAL .............................................................................................................. 6810 7000 - STREETS & TRAFFIC GEOMETRY NEW CUL-DE-SAC REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 7020 CLASS I BIKEWAY – PATH ............................................................................................... 7040 PAVEMENT FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT ELEMENTS .................................................................................. 7110 ASPHALT BERM - 6” .......................................................................................................... 7120 SIGNS METAL SIGN & PARKING METER POSTS ....................................................................... 7210 METAL SIGN & PARKING METER POSTS – IN EXISTING SIDEWALK ......................... 7215 (new) STREET NAME SIGN ......................................................................................................... 7250 TRAFFIC CONTROL ROAD BUMP - CONSTRUCTION DETAILS ...................................................................... 7320 ROAD BUMP - LOCATION, STRIPING & SIGNS .............................................................. 7321 SPEED TABLE - LOCATION, STRIPING & SIGNS ........................................................... 7325 STREET BARRICADE ........................................................................................................ 7330 REMOVABLE BOLLARD .................................................................................................... 7335 BARRICADE - SIDEWALK CLOSURE ............................................................................... 7340 HI-VIS CROSSWALKS ....................................................................................................... 7350 7000 - STREETS & TRAFFIC (CONTINUED) PARKING STREET PARKING ............................................................................................................. 7410 MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE & UPS COMBINED ENCLOSURE ................................................................... 7510 LIGHTING CIRCUIT .......................................................................................................... 7520 BIKE PATH LIGHTING ....................................................................................................... 7905 CITY ENGINEERING STANDARDS NO. STREET LIGHTING - EMBEDDED STEEL POLE ............................................................. 7910 DOWNTOWN PEDESTRIAN LIGHTING .......................................................................... 7915 HYDRANT REFLECTOR .................................................................................................... 7920 BICYCLE RACK .................................................................................................................. 7930 8000 - LANDSCAPING & IRRIGATION STREET TREES STREET TREES - MASTER LIST ...................................................................................... 8010 (2pp) STREET TREES - MAJOR STREETS ............................................................................... 8020 TREE WELLS TREE WELL ........................................................................................................................ 8130 TREE WELL – RAILROAD DISTRICT ................................................................................ 8135 TREE WELL COVER - ALTERNATE METHOD ................................................................. 8150 PLANTING STREET TREE PLANTING NOTES .................................................................................. 8210 TREE PLANTING & STAKING - ZONES 1, 2 & 3 – 15 GALLON SIZE ............................. 8220 TREE PLANTING & STAKING - ZONES 1 & 2 – 24” BOX & LARGER ............................. 8250 SHRUB PLANTING ............................................................................................................. 8410 GROUND COVER PLANTING PATTERN ......................................................................... 8420 IRRIGATION IRRIGATION CONTROLLER ............................................................................................. 8520 MASTER VALVE & FLOW METER .................................................................................... 8550 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW ASSEMBLY ............................................................ 8560 TRENCH DETAILS & THRUST BLOCKS .......................................................................... 8610 ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVE & BOX ............................................................................... 8620 QUICK COUPLER VALVE & BOX ...................................................................................... 8630 IN-LINE VALVE ................................................................................................................... 8640 POPUP HEAD ..................................................................................................................... 8650 DRIP IRRIGATION .............................................................................................................. 8660 TREE BUBBLER ................................................................................................................. 8670 CONCRETE EDGING ......................................................................................................... 8710 RECYCLED WATER - WARNING TAGS, LABELS AND DECALS ................................... 8810 RECYCLED WATER - WARNING SIGNS .......................................................................... 8820 CITY ENGINEERING STANDARDS NO. 9000 - MISCELLANEOUS MAIL BOX LOCATION ........................................................................................................ 9010 MONUMENT & WELL ......................................................................................................... 9020 MANHOLE COVER - CITY COMMUNICATIONS .............................................................. 9030 CITY BENCH ..................................................................................................................... 9040 RAIL FENCE ...................................................................................................................... 9050 TRASH CONTAINER - STANDARD ................................................................................... 9060 APPENDICES A. STATE STANDARD CURB RAMP DETAILS B. MISSION STYLE SIDEWALK DISTRICT MAP C. RAILROAD DISTRICT PLAN MAP D. LIST OF ARTERIAL AND COLLECTOR STREETS E. SAMPLE NOTICE OF STREET MAINTENANCE (DOOR HANGER) F. PLAN DEVELOPMENT STANDARDS G. GUIDELINES FOR CONSTRUCTION ZONES H. SLO COUNTY APCD: PERMIT TO OPERATE NO. 1850-2 I. GUIDELINE SPECIFICATIONS FOR NURSERY TREE QUALITY J. QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM K. TEMPORARY INDUSTRIAL WASTE DISCHARGE PERMIT APPLICATION L. HOLIDAY RESTRICTION AREA PER CITY COUNCIL RESOLUTION 9784 (2003 SERIES) Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA .............................................................................................................5 1. Improvement Plans .............................................................................................................. 6 1.1 Preparation of Plans ................................................................................................................. 6 1.1.1 Plan Review Procedure ...................................................................................................... 6 1.1.2 Plan and Profile Layout ...................................................................................................... 7 1.1.3 Plans Format ...................................................................................................................... 9 1.2 Design Exceptions ................................................................................................................... 12 1.3 Americans with Disability Act Requirements ......................................................................... 13 2. Site Preparation & Grading ..................................................................................................13 2.1 Design Standards .................................................................................................................... 13 2.1.1 Site Preparation ............................................................................................................... 13 2.1.2 Grading Design ................................................................................................................. 14 2.2 Construction............................................................................................................................ 17 2.2.2 Construction Testing ........................................................................................................ 17 3. Roadways ............................................................................................................................18 3.1 Design Standards .................................................................................................................... 18 3.1.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 18 3.1.2 Roadway Classifications ................................................................................................... 19 3.1.3 Design Speed and Design Vehicle .................................................................................... 19 3.1.4 Longitudinal Grade .......................................................................................................... 20 3.1.5 Horizontal and Vertical Alignment .................................................................................. 20 3.1.6 Cross Slope ....................................................................................................................... 21 3.1.7 Intersecting Streets, Roads, Driveways, Alleys – Access Control .................................... 21 3.1.8 Access Management ........................................................................................................ 22 3.1.9 Roadway Structural Section ............................................................................................. 23 3.1.10 Sidewalks ....................................................................................................................... 23 3.1.11 Pedestrian Crossings ...................................................................................................... 25 3.1.12 Bike Facilities .................................................................................................................. 26 3.1.13 Multi-Use Paths ............................................................................................................. 27 3.1.14 Street Parking ................................................................................................................ 27 3.1.15 Bus Turnouts .................................................................................................................. 28 3.1.16 Cross Gutters ................................................................................................................. 28 3.1.17 Sight Distance ................................................................................................................ 28 3.1.18 Roadway Clearances ...................................................................................................... 28 3.1.19 Right-of-Way .................................................................................................................. 29 3.1.20 Barricades, Barriers, and Railings .................................................................................. 30 3.1.21 Street Lighting ................................................................................................................ 30 3.1.22 Intersection Controls ..................................................................................................... 32 3.1.23 Streets Trees .................................................................................................................. 32 3.2 Construction............................................................................................................................ 33 3.2.1 Testing .............................................................................................................................. 33 Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 2 4 Driveways and Off-Street Parking .........................................................................................33 4.1 General .................................................................................................................................... 33 4.2 Permits .................................................................................................................................... 34 4.3 Plans ........................................................................................................................................ 34 4.4 Driveways ................................................................................................................................ 34 4.4.1 Driveways on Arterial and Collector Street ..................................................................... 34 4.4.2 Driveway Widths .............................................................................................................. 34 4.4.3 Number of Driveways Permitted ..................................................................................... 34 4.4.4 Abandoned Driveways ..................................................................................................... 35 4.4.5 Turnarounds – Deep Driveways ....................................................................................... 35 4.4.6 Turnarounds – Single-Family House Driveways .............................................................. 35 4.4.7 Common-Access Driveways ............................................................................................. 35 4.5 Off-Street Parking ................................................................................................................... 36 4.5.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 36 5. Drainage ..............................................................................................................................40 5.1 Design Standards .................................................................................................................... 40 5.1.1 Requirements................................................................................................................... 40 5.1.2 Alignment of Drainage Facilities ...................................................................................... 41 5.1.3 Drainage Structures ......................................................................................................... 42 5.1.4 Bioretention Basins .......................................................................................................... 43 5.1.5 Bioswales ......................................................................................................................... 43 5.1.6 Channel and Swales ......................................................................................................... 45 5.1.7 Culverts and Storm Drains ............................................................................................... 46 5.1.8 Outfalls ............................................................................................................................. 46 5.1.9 Bridges ............................................................................................................................. 46 5.1.10 Fencing ........................................................................................................................... 48 5.2 Post Construction Stormwater Compliance ........................................................................... 48 5.2.1 Performance Requirements ............................................................................................. 48 5.2.2 Stormwater Control Plan ................................................................................................. 51 5.2.3 Operations and Maintenance .......................................................................................... 52 5.3 Groundwater ........................................................................................................................... 53 5.3.1 Subsurface Groundwater Drainage: ................................................................................ 53 5.3.2 Source Control: ................................................................................................................ 53 6. Water Supply ......................................................................................................................55 6.1 Design Standards .................................................................................................................... 55 6.1.1 Quantity of Water ............................................................................................................ 55 6.1.2 Distribution System ......................................................................................................... 55 6.1.3 Cross Connections ............................................................................................................ 57 7. Wastewater .........................................................................................................................58 7.1 Design Standards .................................................................................................................... 58 7.1.1 Quantity of Flow .............................................................................................................. 58 7.1.2 Manholes ......................................................................................................................... 59 Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 3 7.1.3 Pipe .................................................................................................................................. 59 8. Dry Utilities.........................................................................................................................61 8.1 Design Standards .................................................................................................................... 61 8.1.1 General Provisions ........................................................................................................... 61 9. Survey .................................................................................................................................62 9.1 Street Monuments .................................................................................................................. 62 9.2 Tract Boundary Monuments ................................................................................................... 62 9.3 Lot Stakes ................................................................................................................................ 62 9.4 Vertical Control (Benchmarks) ................................................................................................ 63 10. Landscaping and Irrigation .................................................................................................63 10.1 General .................................................................................................................................. 63 10.2 Submittals ............................................................................................................................. 63 10.2.1 Development Review ..................................................................................................... 63 10.2.2 Building Application ....................................................................................................... 63 10.2.3 Project Completion ........................................................................................................ 64 10.3 Landscaping Design ............................................................................................................... 64 10.3.1 Water Use ...................................................................................................................... 64 10.3.2 Irrigation Plan ................................................................................................................ 65 10.3.3 Soils Management Report ............................................................................................. 66 10.3.4 Grading Plan ................................................................................................................... 67 10.4 Miscellaneous City Facility Provisions: ................................................................................. 67 10.4.1 Irrigation System Operational Requirements ................................................................ 67 10.4.2 Hardscape ...................................................................................................................... 67 10.4.3 Median islands ............................................................................................................... 68 10.4.4 Playgrounds and Miscellaneous areas ........................................................................... 68 10.4.5 System Pressure ............................................................................................................. 68 10.4.6 Controller ....................................................................................................................... 69 11. Subdivision Design Criteria and Improvement Standards ....................................................69 11.1 General requirement ............................................................................................................ 69 11.2 Improvements ....................................................................................................................... 69 11.3 Lot Design ............................................................................................................................. 70 11.3.1 Multiple frontages ......................................................................................................... 70 11.3.2 Lot lines .......................................................................................................................... 70 11.3.3 Flag lots (deep lot subdivision) ...................................................................................... 70 12. Construction of Private Development Projects ..................................................................70 12.1 Before Construction .............................................................................................................. 71 12.1.1 Pre-Construction Conference ........................................................................................ 71 12.1.2 Contractor’s Requirements............................................................................................ 71 12.2 During Construction .............................................................................................................. 72 12.2.1 Inspection by Engineer of Work .................................................................................... 72 12.2.2 Workplace and Worksite Conduct ................................................................................. 72 12.2.3 Clean Up ......................................................................................................................... 72 Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 4 12.3 Project Completion ............................................................................................................... 73 12.3.1 Clean Up ......................................................................................................................... 73 12.3.2 Record Drawings ............................................................................................................ 73 12.3.3 Improvements to be Accepted for City Maintenance ................................................... 73 Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 5 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA General The purpose of establishing these Standards is to help provide guidance for design of public facilities to better ensure health, safety, and enhance community quality of life. These standards are not intended to be a substitute for engineering knowledge, experience, or judgment. It is incumbent on the users of these standards to exercise good judgment, and where needed, seek guidance from the appropriate professional. This document must be used for new or reconstruction of existing facilities. Where deviation from these standards is necessary, the designer must follow the Design Exception process outlined in this document. These standards are not retroactive, existing facilities constructed prior to these standards are not required to comply with these standards. New construction and reconstruction must comply with these standards unless a design exception has been approved by the City. The applicant is responsible to either ensure facilities are designed in compliance with these standards, or to secure design exception approval. This document is supported by various publications that comprise the standard references for Public Works projects. In event of conflict, it is the applicant’s responsibility to notify the City of that conflict and request clarification. Without that notification, these standards will take precedence. Reference documents include: 1. City of San Luis Obispo Engineering Standards 2. City of San Luis Obispo Standard Specifications 3. City of San Luis Obispo Community Design Standards 4. City of San Luis Obispo Fire Development Guide 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards 6. Caltrans State Standard Plans 7. Caltrans State Standard Specifications 8. San Luis Obispo County Public Improvement Standards 9. Caltrans Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) 10. Caltrans Highway Design Manual (HDM) 11. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets 12. Americans with Disabilities Act Guidelines (ADAG) 13. Pedestrian Right-of-Way Accessibility Guidelines (PROWAG) 14. Caltrans DIB 82-05 Pedestrian Accessibility Guidelines for Highway Projects 15. National Association of City Transportation Officials (NACTO) The applicant is responsible for obtaining any other required regulatory permits prior to the start of construction. The Regulatory Agencies that may have jurisdiction over the applicant’s project include, but are not limited to: 1. California Regional Water Quality Control Board (RWQCB) 2. California Department of Fish and Wildlife 3. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (ACOE) 4. Air Pollution Control District (APCD) 5. County of San Luis Obispo Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 6 6. State Department of Transportation (Caltrans) 7. United States Environmental Protection Agency 8. United States Fish and Wildlife Service 9. California Department of Water Resources (DWR) Approval of any improvements plans for construction by the City does not exempt the applicant/owner/contractor from compliance with regulations from other agencies and obtaining authority to construct improvements from all required agencies. 1. Improvement Plans Complete plans and specifications for all proposed public improvements that are not initiated by City of San Luis Obispo must conform to these Standards. All improvement plans must be prepared and signed by a registered Civil Engineer. Plans and specifications must be submitted to the City for review and approval prior to the beginning of construction of any such improvements. Each utility company whose facilities are involved must sign the original plans indicating they have reviewed and approved the plans. Construction may not begin until the plans are signed by the City, and all submittals required have been provided to the City. 1.1 Preparation of Plans 1.1.1 Plan Review Procedure A. Plan Check Intake at First Submittal The Project Engineer must schedule an “intake” appointment, at which time the City will determine whether the application package is complete. Checklists for various types of submittals are available on the City’s web site www.slocity.org. Incomplete application packages or plans not conforming to the normal standards of quality and neatness will be rejected. Project approval may be subject to public utility review and approval. It is the responsibility of the Applicant to submit directly to those companies. B. Plan Revisions The applicant shall address all plan check comments or redlines prior to resubmittal. The Applicant must provide a plan check response memo outlining the response to the plan check comments. In addition, the applicant shall bubble or delta and number any changes made to the plans not associated with the plan check comments. Failure to supply the required plan check response memo or denote separate plan changes will result in rejection of plans at resubmittal. When all corrections have been made to the satisfaction of the City, the Applicant must submit original signed, sealed and dated drawings for approval. Plans are not approved until the City signifies approval by signature on the title sheet of the original drawings. Construction is not authorized until the plans are approved and a construction permits have been issued by the City. Plan revision must be approved by the City prior to being constructed. The Applicant must submit a plan addendum that clearly shows the desired change, and if needed, a request for a variance from City Standards. C. Phased Improvements Where the submitted improvement plans cover only a portion of the ultimate development, the plans submitted must be accompanied by the approved overall tentative plan. The tentative plan must demonstrate that the phased improvements are compatible with future phases. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 7 1.1.2 Plan and Profile Layout All plans must be prepared on: 1. Mylar; 2. Vellum; 3. Bond; or 4. Approved equal Measuring 24" x 36" (ARCH D). Plans prepared for minor projects that do not require design professionals may be submitted on letter or tabloid size bond paper. Appropriate plan scales are: Horizontal Vertical 1-inch=20-feet 1-inch=2-feet or 1-inch=4-feet 1-inch=30-feet 1-inch=3-feet or 1-inch=6-feet 1-inch=40-feet 1-inch=4-feet or 1-inch=8-feet The scale may be varied in rough terrain upon approval of the City. A. Earthwork If any grading is proposed outside the roadway prism, a grading plan must be submitted with the other required improvement plans. Finished grading must be depicted by contour lines, spot elevations, or by “top/toe” indications, as determined appropriate by the City. The grading plan must include a reference to the project soils report, including its title, date and author. In addition, the applicant shall provide the City with proof of an easement or right of entry when grading occurs on private property. The City may request a slope easement for the offsite improvement. B. Retaining Walls For any proposed retaining walls, a separate sheet must be provided which depicts the elevation view and typical section for each wall. The applicant shall provide appropriate easements for walls located on private property. Walls on private property for new improvements shall be maintained by the private landowner, maintenance association or homeowner’s association. C. Roadway Improvements Roadway plan and profile sheets must be of appropriate scale to clearly show the proposed plan layout, along with existing and proposed profiles of all roadways. The boundaries of lots fronting on the roadway, drainage easements, utility easements, slope easements, section lines and corners, land grant lines and temporary construction easements must be shown on all roadway improvement sheets, including proper dimensions. Each roadway plan and profile sheet must include the typical roadway section. The computed curve data for all centerline curves must be shown on the plans. Streets may be required to be extended to the boundary of a site proposed for development. In such cases, the plans must include an extension of the street profile for a minimum distance of 200-feet beyond the project limits, depicting both existing grade and a potential design grade that comply with the required design speed. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 8 D. Cross Sections Cross sections must be provided for all designs involving existing road widening. The spacing of cross sections must be based on the characteristics of the project, and as determined necessary by the City. E. Storm Drainage Plans for minor drainage facilities may be shown on roadway plans. Plans for major drainage facilities must conform to the sheet size and scale shown above for roadway improvements and included in separate sheets. Profiles of all culverts and drainage structures must be provided, along with the hydraulic grade line for the design event. F. Water Supply and Wastewater Disposal Plans for water and wastewater disposal system improvement layout may be submitted on the same plans as the roadways. Improvements outside the roadway prism must be drawn on separate sheets and to an appropriate scale. G. Utilities A layout for all utilities including water, sewer, electric, telephone, fiber optic, cable television and gas system improvements must be submitted on a composite utility plan in an appropriate scale, unless approved otherwise by the City. Roadway plans must show placement of utilities in the typical section. The composite utility plan must clearly show existing overhead utilities, utility poles and guy wires. The exhibit must clearly show facilities that are going to be undergrounded and poles removed and those poles and facilities that are to remain overhead. All required easements shall be shown and dimensioned. A plan completeness checklist is available for download from the Utilities Department’s online documents and files (http://www.slocity.org/government/department-directory/utilities-department/documents-and-files). The checklist covers general items that will facilitate the plan check review process. H. Traffic Control Plans for work zone traffic control, and for installation of new permanent traffic control devices and roadway striping, must be drawn on sheets and to an appropriate scale. Work zone traffic control must reference and comply with the most current version of the California MUTCD. If new permanent traffic control devices include traffic signals or lighting, the necessary electrical details must be incorporated into the sheets. I. Erosion Control Temporary and permanent erosion control measures are to be shown on a separate plan sheet(s). J. Landscape Plans Landscape plans must demonstrate that the landscaping, irrigation, and other features within the right-of-way comply with City Standards including sight distance adequacy, lateral clearance from the roadway and sidewalks, and other improvements within the right-of-way. Standards for irrigation facilities are contained in these Engineering Standards. K. Details The plans must include one or more sheets entitled “Details,” which show the following as applicable: Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 9 1. Detail of all concrete or other structures. 2. Details of any element of the plans required for clarity. 3. Miscellaneous details. 4. Other agencies’ standard details which are referenced in the design. 5. Temporary and permanent erosion control standards/details referenced in the design. 1.1.3 Plans Format The following items are to be submitted to the City for review and approval: A. Title Sheet On improvement plans exceeding two sheets in the set, a title sheet must be included. The title sheet must include an index of sheets, stormwater Construction General Permit information and Post Construction Stormwater Requirements including: 1. Index of sheets 2. Vicinity Map 3. Stormwater Construction General Permit Information a. WDID b. Area of project disturbance (Plans that disturb one acre or greater must include a SWPPP) 4. Post Construction Stormwater Information a. Area of existing impervious surfaces b. Area of new or reconstructed impervious services c. Stormwater Post Construction Regulation Tier 5. Current version date of City of San Luis Obispo’s Engineering Standard and Standard Specification governing work including listing of all requested or approved design standard exceptions. B. Vicinity Map The title sheet must include a vicinity map depicting the following: 1. Boundaries of the site with City Limits 2. North arrow and scale reference 3. Street names C. Title Block Each sheet of the set of drawings, including the title sheet, must have an approved title block showing: 1. Date 2. Name and/or project number. 3. Project Engineer’s name, professional registration number, seal and signature, as required by the Professional Engineers’ Act. 4. Scale of the drawing. 5. Sheet number and total number of sheets. 6. Sheet title matching the Index of Sheets. 7. Signature blocks for City approval. D. Right-of-Way Show and properly dimension on plans: 1. Right-of-way lines Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 10 2. Boundaries of lots fronting on the roadway 3. Drainage easements 4. Utility easements 5. Slope easements 6. Temporary construction easements (existing and proposed). E. Survey Monuments Pursuant to Section 8771(b) of the California Business and Professions Code, existing survey monuments that control the location of: 1. subdivisions, 2. tracts, 3. boundaries, 4. roads, 5. streets, 6. highways, and 7. provide survey control, that are within or adjacent to the area of work, must be located and referenced by a licensed land surveyor or registered civil engineer. This must occur prior to the time when any: 8. streets, 9. highways, 10. other rights-of-way, and 11. easements, Are: 12. improved, 13. constructed, 14. reconstructed, 15. maintained, 16. resurfaced, or 17. relocated. Survey monuments shall be located, tied out, and a corner record filed, by a Professional Land Surveyor, if the construction will disturb the monument. If any existing survey monument is disturbed in any way by the improvement work, as determined by a licensed land surveyor or registered civil engineer licensed prior to 1982, it must be reset accordingly and an appropriate document must be filed with the County, prior to the final acceptance of the work by the City. F. Topography All pertinent topographic features which may affect the: 1. design, 2. construction, and 3. operation of the improvements, Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 11 must be shown on the plans, including but not limited to the following: 4. Curbs, sidewalks, shoulders. 5. Existing structures, fences, trees and other foliage. 6. Existing utility lines and facilities. 7. High water and frequent inundation limits. 8. Roadway lines. 9. Storm drains, drainage ditches. 10. Wastewater Disposal systems. 11. Water lines, fire hydrants. Full topography must be provided for a minimum of 50-feet in all directions of a development site, to evaluate drainage conditions. G. Profiles The plans must clearly show the existing and proposed profiles of all: 1. Roadways 2. Drainage ditches 3. Storm drains 4. Water lines 5. Sanitary sewers 6. Clearances at structures and power lines Including elevations at 25-foot minimum intervals for warped surfaces. H. Design Basis The plans must include the basis for design as follows: 1. Road Plans: a. Design Speed (V) b. Design Volume (ADT) c. Traffic Index (TI) 2. Culverts: a. Slope (S) b. Design Flow c. Storm Interval (QX) 3. Storm Drains: a. Hydraulic Grade Line (HGL) b. Slope (S) c. Design Flow & Storm (QX) 4. Drainage Structures: The numerical quantities flow quantity for the Primary Design Storm 5. Drainage Basins: a. Design Volume, b. Design Inflow (QIN) c. Design Outflow (QOUT) d. Tributary Area (A) Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 12 e. Design Infiltration Rate 6. Sewer Systems: a. Pre-development design flows b. Post-development design flows c. Average and peak flow rates d. Equivalent Dwelling Units (EDUs) 7. Water Systems: a. Pre-development design flows b. Post-development design flows c. Average Daily Demand (ADD) d. Maximum Daily Demand (MDD) e. Peak Hour Flow (PHF) f. Equivalent Dwelling Units (EDUs) I. Stationing and Orientation The stationing on plan and profile sheets must read from left to right. Plans must be arranged so that the north arrow is either pointed toward the top or to the right edge of the sheet. Adjustments may be considered when matching existing stations from other plans. J. Benchmark The plans datum must be based on published benchmark information from the City of San Luis Obispo. Include a description of the benchmark and the datum for its reference elevation. The plans must reference a durable local benchmark that will be utilized for the construction of the improvements and must include an indication of its location on the Vicinity Map or the plans. K. Basis of Bearings The plans must indicate the basis of bearings that will be used for construction of the improvements. The plans must include a description of the points that form the basis of bearings, along with the appropriate reference information. L. Units of Measurement The units of measurement on plans submitted to the City must be English Units. M. Text The minimum text size on full size plans must be 3/32” (or 0.1”). 1.2 Design Exceptions Unusual site conditions or matching existing infrastructure may warrant a deviation from these standards. Where such situations occur, the Engineer of Work may request a design exception. The Engineer of Work must demonstrate that the proposed deviation adequately addresses: 1. public health and safety 2. long term maintenance 3. environmental impacts 4. orderly community development. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 13 Avoiding or reducing project costs is not an adequate justification for design exception approval. As these assessments require professional engineering judgment, all design exception proposals must be prepared by a registered professional engineer and submitted to the City for review and approval prior to construction. Requests for a design exception must be proposed in writing by the Engineer of Work following the prescribed format. The Engineer of Work must sign and seal the Design Exception Application submitted to the City. 1.3 Americans with Disability Act Requirements The Americans with Disability Act (ADA) was signed into Federal law in 1990. ADA seeks to provide equal access to public facilities for all Americans regardless of age or physical ability. Since the ADA and accessibility requirements are contained within Federal and State law, users of these standards are also expected to fully comply with the law. The information included in these standards is provided to assist the user and to help ensure City facilities are also in compliance. A. Design Requirements The design and placement of ADA facilities within the public right-of way including curb ramps and designated parking spaces must comply with: 1. Caltrans Design Information Bulletin; DIB 82-05 Pedestrian Accessibility Guidelines for Highway Projects 2. Caltrans Standard Drawing A88A – Curb Ramp Details 3. Caltrans Standard Drawing A88B – Curb Ramp and Island Passageway Details 4. Caltrans Standard Drawings A90A and A90B – Accessible Parking Curb ramps must be designed and detailed with spot elevations, slopes, dimensions, and profiles of both the existing condition and proposed design. B. Design Aids The following are useful design aids for understanding and implementing ADA within the Public Right of Way: 1. CalDAG (California Disabled Accessibility Guidebook) 2. ADAG (Americans with Disabilities Act Guidelines) 3. PROWAG (Pedestrian Right-of-Way Accessibility Guidelines) C. Design Exceptions Design exceptions to ADA requirements must be specifically reviewed and approved by the City prior to construction. Requests for an ADA design exception must be proposed in writing by the Engineer of Work. The Engineer of Work must also sign and seal the Design Exception. 2. Site Preparation & Grading 2.1 Design Standards 2.1.1 Site Preparation This section provides standards for all work that is required to prepare a site for construction of any public improvements, as defined in these Public Improvement Standards. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 14 A. Verification of Underground Utilities The location of underground utilities must be verified prior to excavation for all work that is covered by these standards and which also includes excavation or other risk to underground utilities. Potholing for locating utilities, for placing sign posts, or for placing fence posts must also be considered as excavation for the purposes of this section. 1. The person(s) performing the excavation must verify the exact location and depth of all utilities including those not shown on the plan prior to start of work. 2. Contact Underground Service Alert (USA) at (800) 642-2444 at least 48 hours before but not more than 10 days before the excavation. B. Clearing and Grubbing Clearing and grubbing activities must conform to the Standard Specifications. Additional requirements must apply if determined necessary by the project soils and geological report. C. Tree Removal All trees to be removed or impacted must be depicted on the improvement plans, and must be consistent with the environmental determination which was prepared for the project. Required tree removals must comply with section 12.24 of the City’s Municipal Code. D. Refuse Management All projects must provide a plan for the collection, and disposal of solid waste material for both the residential and non-residential uses during construction, and post-construction activities. The plan must be submitted for approval by the City's Utilities Services Manager and the Community Development Director addressing the following codes and standards: 1. Management of refuse generations for waste, recyclables, and organics shall comply with state law, AB 1826, and the local waste management ordinance aimed to reduce greenhouse gas emissions. 2. Access to trash enclosure(s) shall conform to the requirements by the San Luis Garbage Company and refuse bins shall be sized to provide a reasonable level of service. 3. Separate refuse bins shall be accommodated within the site for waste, recycling, and organics. 4. Designs of trash enclosures shall comply with engineering standards, and aesthetic standards set by the Community Development Department. 2.1.2 Grading Design Where applicable, grading constructed for projects regulated by these City Standards must conform to Sections 4 through 22 of the Standard Specifications and the latest edition of the California Building Code (CBC). In addition, grading activity reviewed by the City will be subject to the requirements listed below. A. Grading Plan Submittals All grading plans reviewed by the City must address the following requirements in their submittals: Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 15 1. Soils and Geological Report The City may require a foundation and soils investigation and/or an engineering geologic report to substantiate road designs. For any grading, which may or will involve a structure (building pads, retaining wall foundations, etc.) the City will: a) require that a foundation and soils investigation and/or engineering geologic report be submitted with the plans, or b) documentation that a foundation and soils investigation and/or engineering geologic report is not required, in accordance with CBC Chapter 18, Section 1803. If a foundation and soils investigation and/or engineering geologic report are required, the preparer of the investigation and/or the report must provide, prior to plan approval, a letter to the City stating that the plans were reviewed by him/her and that the plans conform to the investigation and/or the report. 2. Grading Quantities The Project Engineer must enumerate the quantity of cut and of fill on the grading plan Title Sheet. When the project site is not anticipated to balance, a note must be provided on the grading plans stating that the earthwork sending/receiving site must secure the necessary permits prior to commencing work. When requested, then engineer of work must demonstrate that the necessary permits have been obtained prior to importing or exporting soil. 3. Erosion/Sedimentation Control Plan All public improvements involving grading must prepare an Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan. The grading plans must include a note identifying that proper dust control must be maintained at all times during construction. Dust control must conform to the provisions of Section 10 of the Standard Specifications. 4. Area of Disturbance The total Area of Disturbance for the project must be shown on the Title Sheet. All projects involving site disturbance great than one acre must comply with the requirements of the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). The Developer must submit a Notice of intent (NOI) to comply with the General Permit for Construction Activity with the Regional Water Quality Control Board (RWQCB). The Developer must provide the City with the Waste Discharge Identification Number (WDID #). B. Grading Site Boundaries Each lot line within a proposed new subdivision must be considered a “grading site boundary” for purposes of implementing grading setbacks as required by the CBC. C. Foundation Elevations All grading designs must depict on the plans the “point of discharge” which satisfies the requirements of the CBC, Section 1805. D. Elevation Standards The following requirements for the relationship between street improvements and building elevations must also apply to the architectural plans for building construction: 1. The plans must depict the finish floor elevation at all building entrances fronting a current or future public street. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 16 2. The plans must depict the back-of-sidewalk elevations at the locations of all building entrances referenced in #1, based on a typical sidewalk cross-slope of 1.5%. 3. The plans must demonstrate compliance with ADA and CBC requirements for pedestrian access to all building entrances. E. Slope Easements Required Slope maintenance easements must be required for any excavation or embankment slopes which are steeper than 5:1 (horizontal: vertical) that extend outside the right-of-way. All such easements must also provide for access and working space rights. F. Retaining Walls Prior approval is required for the construction of any: 1. reinforced concrete, 2. reinforced concrete masonry unit (CMU), or 3. mortar-less element retaining wall which would require a building permit. If a proposed wall is below the threshold where a building permit would be required, it must be shown in the grading plan in order to evaluate its relationship to site drainage. Retaining walls must be constructed based on an approved design. Examples of approved designs include: 1. Design Standards from the State Standard Plans. 2. Design Standards from an approved alternate reference. 3. Designs prepared, signed and sealed by a registered civil engineer. In addition, the following requirements apply to any retaining walls proposed as part of any public improvements: 1. Designs for any retaining wall must include the location in plan view, a typical cross section, and an elevation view of the full length of the proposed wall. The Project Engineer must also provide all design calculations, signed and sealed, to the City for review, along with any applicable foundation and soils investigation or engineering geologic reports. 2. Wood retaining walls may not be greater than 2-feet in exposed height, and may be considered appropriate for landscaping purposes only. Wood retaining walls must not be located within the right- of-way. 3. Any wall greater than 30-inches in exposed height, within 3 feet of walkway, must include a guard (pedestrian railing) as defined in CBC Chapter 10, Section 1013 “Guards,” or maintenance worker fence as defined by Cal-OSHA and shown in the State Standard Plans. 4. The Engineer of Work must demonstrate that wall designs are appropriate for the soil and loading conditions. G. Preservation of Trees Existing trees within the area of any grading must be preserved as required by the conditions of approval for the subdivision or land use permit. All trees to be removed or impacted must be clearly shown on the grading plan. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 17 H. Stockpile Requirements If a project will be stockpiling material from either on-site or off-site sources the following design criteria applies: 1. All stockpile location(s) must be shown on the grading plan and erosion control plan as well as the SWPPP, if a SWPPP is required. Stockpiles must be located a minimum of 50-feet away from drainage structures and water bodies such as creeks, rivers and drainage courses. Stockpiles must not be in environmentally sensitive areas. 2. Stockpiles may not be located on slopes greater than 20%. 3. No stockpile may remain longer than 6 months without prior written approval from the City. 4. All stockpiles must be shaped, not left in an “end dump condition”. Stockpiles must have a slope of 3:1 or flatter with the top surface sloped downhill at minimum of 0.5% and a maximum of 5%. 5. Maximum height of any one stock pile may be 20 feet. 6. No one stockpile may exceed 5,000-cubic yards. Adjacent stock piles must not be located closer than 50-feet to each other. Measured from edge to edge. 7. All stockpiles regardless of time of year must have silt fence installed immediately around the perimeter of the stockpile at the toe of slope. This silt fence must be maintained until stockpile is removed. 8. Between April 15th and October 15th stockpiles remaining in-active for longer than one week must be covered with plastic and secured to control dust. 9. Between October 15th and April 15th (rainy season) stockpiles must be stripped of plastic coverings and appropriate Best Management Practices that reduce erosion potential and stabilize the slopes i.e. hydro-seeding, straw, straw wattles etc. be implemented. 10. Once a stockpile is removed, the area below must be returned to the original contours or final project finished grades with established vegetation. This must be done prior to acceptance of improvements. 2.2 Construction 2.2.2 Construction Testing A. Compaction Standards The Project Engineer must collect compaction data throughout construction and as required by the CBC. Following completion of the work, the Project Engineer must provide compaction reports to the City, certifying compliance with these requirements, for all the following areas: 1. Each graded lot pad 2. All roadways 3. All roadway shoulders 4. All sidewalk areas 5. All utility trenches B. Elevation Certification The Project Engineer must collect elevation data for all graded lot pads. Following completion of the work, the Project Engineer must provide elevation certifications to the City prior to grading permit final, or building foundation pour, whichever occurs first. C. Inspections 1. The Developer must be responsible for ensuring that all required inspections are requested and performed; the Project Engineer must be responsible for the competency of all required inspections. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 18 2. The Project Engineer must either: (a) document that no Special Inspections are required, or (b) prepare a Statement of Special Inspections in accordance with CBC Chapter 17, Section 1704. D. Grading in Open Space Areas No grading may occur in any Open Space area before the pertinent Open Space Agreement is recorded. E. Erosion Control During Construction Follow-up applications of hydro-seeding must be made as needed to maintain adequate soil protection. These applications must avoid over-spray onto the traveled way, sidewalks, lined drainage channels, and existing vegetation. After any rainfall event, the Developer is responsible for maintaining all slopes to prevent erosion. F. Retaining Walls Inspection Inspections are required at several phases of wall construction. 1. Footings (prior to pour) 2. Walls: 16. Masonry: Pre-grout/reinforcement steel (prior to grouting) 17. Reinforced concrete: Forms and reinforcement steel (prior to pouring) 3. Backfill/drainage (prior to backfill) 4. Final 3. Roadways 3.1 Design Standards 3.1.1 General All roadway cross sections must generally conform with adopted Specific Plans and the Circulation Element of the General Plan, as modified by City direction specific to the area, and circumstances of development. The design of a subdivision street system must result from an evaluation of topographical conditions, the traffic generated by the types and numbers of planned uses, and the purpose of each street. Street systems should be built to naturally encourage walking, community, safety and environmental stewardship. The City supports concepts such as Complete Streets, Green Streets, and Living Streets. Special approvals by the City Engineer will be needed for alternative street widths and elements. Minimum clear and passable street widths will be as required by the Fire Department. A complete street is a street designed and built to accommodate all users of the roadway including: 1. Pedestrians 2. Bicyclists 3. transit riders 4. commercial vehicles 5. general motorists. A complete street provides access for all users regardless of age or ability. In sloping terrain, separate one-way travel lanes may be used to reduce cut and fill. Such one-way lanes must have a minimum unobstructed width of twenty feet, a minimum paved width of fourteen feet, and a maximum length of five hundred feet. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 19 Wet utilities should be placed within the roadway prism for maximum accessibility. 3.1.2 Roadway Classifications Classification Maximum ADT Minimum LOS Desired Maximum Speed Local Commercial Streets 5,000 - 25 mph Local Residential Streets 1,500 - 25 mph Commercial Collector Streets 10,000 - 25 mph Residential Collector Streets (Minor) 3,000 - 25 mph Residential Collector Streets (Major) 5,000 - 25 mph Residential Arterials - LOS D 85th Percentile Arterial Streets - LOS D LOS E - Downtown 85th Percentile Parkway Arterials/ Regional Routes - LOS D 85th Percentile Highway/Freeway/Ramps - LOS D 85th Percentile Local Commercial Streets directly serve non-residential development that front them and channel traffic to commercial collector streets. Local Residential Streets directly serve residential development that front them and channel traffic to residential collector streets. Commercial Collector Streets collect traffic from commercial areas and channel it to arterials. Residential Collector Streets collect traffic from residential areas and channel it to arterials. Residential Arterials are bordered by residential property where preservation of neighborhood character is as important as providing for traffic flow and where speeds should be controlled. Arterial Streets provide circulation between major activity centers and residential areas. Parkway Arterials are arterial streets with landscaped medians and roadside areas, where the number of cross streets is limited and direct access from fronting properties is discouraged. Highway/Regional Routes connect the city with other parts of the county and are used by people traveling throughout the county and state and are designated as primary traffic carriers. Segments of these routes leading into San Luis Obispo should include landscaped medians and roadside areas to better define them as community entryways. Freeway is a regional route of significance where access is controlled. 3.1.3 Design Speed and Design Vehicle Speed for City roads is defined as follows: Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 20 1. Average Speed is the summation of the instantaneous or spot-measured speeds at a specific location of vehicles divided by the number of vehicles observed. 2. Design Speed is used to determine the various geometric design features of a roadway. Design speed is selected in accordance with these standards or as determined by the City. 3. 85th-Percentile Speed is based upon measured field data and is the speed at or below which 85 percent of the motor vehicles travel. 4. Operating Speed is the speed at which a typical vehicle or the overall traffic operates. Operating speed might be defined with speed values such as the average, pace, or 85th percentile speeds. 5. Pace is the 10-mph speed range representing the speeds of the largest percentage of vehicles in the traffic stream. 6. Posted Speed is the speed determined following an engineering and traffic survey (CVC 627). 7. Prevailing Speed is the 85th percentile speed. 8. Running Speed is the average operating speed over a selected road segment. On a straight level road segment, the running speed will typically equal the prevailing speed throughout the road segment. On road segments with varying conditions such as a curving mountain road, the operating speed may vary at different points along the segment. The running speed is typically determined by the measuring average time to travel the full segment. Roadway design speed for existing roadway must match existing 85th percentile vehicle speeds. Design speed for new streets is shown below: Classification Design Speed Design Vehicle* Local Commercial Streets 25 mph SU-40 Local Residential Streets 25 mph SU-30 Commercial Collector Streets 25 mph WB-50 Residential Collector Streets 25 mph SU-30 Residential Arterials 45 mph WB-50 Arterial Streets 45 mph WB-50 Parkway Arterials 45 mph WB-50 Highway/Regional Routes 45 mph WB-50 Freeway 55 mph WB-50 *See AASHTO "A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets" for design vehicle dimensions All roadways and access driveways must provide necessary turn around space for emergency vehicles as required by the Fire Department. 3.1.4 Longitudinal Grade Design of street grades must comply with the most current edition of AASHTO manual "A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets." 3.1.5 Horizontal and Vertical Alignment Design of roadway curvature must comply with the most current edition of AASHTO manual "A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets." Avoid use of compound curves. Use a minimum of 50-foot separation between horizontal curves. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 21 Provide curb radii that allows for the design vehicles to turn at an intersection without crossing the centerline and into oncoming traffic. The minimum radii for curb ramps is 20’ to allow for street sweeping. All streets must intersect other streets at right angles, and must have at least 50 feet of centerline tangent, as measured from the prolongation of the cross-street property line to the angle point or beginning of curve. Space for vehicles to turn-around must be provided at the ends of access streets with no outlet. A cul-de-sac may include landscaping or parking within a central island so long as space for turning and backing from driveways is provided. Design of terminus streets, such as cul-de-sacs, must be to the satisfaction of the City Fire Department and City Engineer. This requirement may be waived when the City determines the roadway may be extended, within a reasonable timeframe, in the future 3.1.6 Cross Slope The slope transverse to the profile or flowline of roads or streets must conform to the following: 1. The standard cross-slope to be used for all new construction is 2.0 percent. 2. The minimum cross slope for widening any roads or streets is 1.0 percent, except for superelevated sections or approaches to cross gutters. 3. The maximum cross slope for widening any roads or streets is 5.0 percent, except for superelevated sections. 4. Grade breaks in the cross slope must be minimized where possible and in no case, be greater than 1.0 percent (algebraic difference) within the traveled lanes nor more than 3.0 percent (algebraic difference) within the paved shoulders. Streets designed with superelevations must comply with the most current version of the HDM. Slopes for crossings and access points must meet accessibility requirements. Cross slope must be considered during street construction and rehabilitation design. 3.1.7 Intersecting Streets, Roads, Driveways, Alleys – Access Control When two streets or roads intersect, neither must have a grade greater than 3.0 percent for a minimum distance of 40-feet measured from the curb line of the intersected street or road to the beginning of the first vertical curve. In unusually rough terrain, the City may allow up to a maximum of 5.0 percent. Driveway connections to streets must be designed to conform to the sight distance and spacing requirements of the HDM Table 405.1B Application of Sight Distance Requirements and Engineering Standard 2120 and 7410. Driveways may not be located adjacent to intersection’s operational areas. Block lengths for local, collector, and arterial streets must comply with the latest version of the HDM Table 405.1B Application of Sight Distance Requirements for intersection spacing. For local and collector street block lengths in no case may be less than 150 feet and greater than 600 feet. For arterial streets block lengths in no case may be less than 600 feet. Street systems should be networked to improve connectivity and reduce travel distances for alternative transportation. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 22 Street intersections must meet at an angle of 90 degrees where possible and in no case, may this angle be less than 85 degrees. Waiver of access rights from abutting properties to public streets may be required by the City. Waiver of access rights must be approved by the City and clearly shown on the final or parcel map. Alleys may be required in industrial, commercial, and residential subdivisions where necessary to provide alternative controlled access to arterial and thoroughfare streets. Alley right-of-way and pavement width must be a minimum of twenty feet. Where two alleys intersect, a paved area free of obstructions must be provided for safe visibility and turning. 3.1.8 Access Management Private access points shall be designed in accordance with the following principles: 1. Limit and consolidate direct access to streets when possible. 2. Address topographical and geometric limitations that may impact safety & operations 3. Minimize interference with through-traffic operations and accommodate adequate lane capacity for on-site traffic conditions. 4. Promote uniformly and well-spaced full movement intersections to reduce travel delay and crash risk. Secondary or more access points are provided based on necessity, where more than one access point is required or indispensable to the property due to circumstances that cannot be sufficiently mitigated by other means. There should be objective and factual evidence to justify and document necessity for multiple access points. A. Intersections & Driveways: Intersections should be well spaced at uniform intervals to help support the smooth and safe flow of traffic. New intersections should not be spaced where functional areas (Figure A-1) overlap. Intersections that would otherwise require all-way stop control or signalization should be controlled by Roundabouts or Neighborhood Traffic Circle. All-way stop or signal control may be used if a roundabout or traffic circle control is determined to be not feasible or operate at unacceptable levels. One-half mile spacing is recommended for traffic signals on major arterials. New or modified driveways shall not be allowed within the functional area (Figure A-1) of adjacent signalized intersections with approach speeds of 30 mph or higher. Driveways maybe placed within the functional area when left turns are restricted or the intersection is controlled by a roundabout. New driveways on streets with speeds of 30 mph or higher should be have minimum spacing per the table below. Where property frontage length restricts attainment of minimum driveway spacing, driveways should be placed at the maximum spacing feasible. Closely spaced driveways may require restriction of left turns or application of a shared driveway. Figure A-1: Functional Area Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 23 Speed 30 MPH 225'+ 95th Percentile Queue Length 35 MPH 320'+ 95th Percentile Queue Length 40 MPH 420'+ 95th Percentile Queue Length 45 MPH 515'+ 95th Percentile Queue Length 50 MPH 610'+ 95th Percentile Queue Length 55 MPH 710'+ 95th Percentile Queue Length Upstream Functional Area Distance Speed 25 MPH 30 MPH 35 MPH 40 MPH 45 MPH 50 MPH 55 MPH 360' 430' 500' Downstream Functional Area & Min. Driveway Spacing Distance 200' 250' 300' 150' See Section 4 “Driveways and Off-Street Parking” for additional requirements. 3.1.9 Roadway Structural Section Pavement design must follow the HDM, be based on a 20-year design life and the "R-value" of the subgrade material. New local streets must be designed for a 50-year life. Pavement thickness must be based on Traffic Indices shown in City Engineering Standard 7110. New Roads must be designed to include the Caltrans safety factors of 0.20-foot and 0.10-foot, for flexible pavement with a base layer and for full depth asphalt, respectively. The Empirical Method for calculation of the structural section is discussed in Topic 633 of the HDM. Variations of the design standards and pavement materials may be approved by the City Engineer to meet individual circumstances. 3.1.10 Sidewalks A. General Sidewalks are required on both sides of a roadway and must be designed and constructed per Engineering Standards. In compliance with Municipal Code Section 12.16.020 & 12.16.050 curb, gutter and sidewalk must be installed and maintained along a properties full frontage. In area without curb, gutter and sidewalk new curb, gutter and sidewalk must be installed with any building permit issuance that will: 1. construct or move a new building onto the property, or 2. reconstruct or remodel an existing building increasing the valuation of that building more than 50%. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 24 In the event a frontage has been previously improved with concrete curbs, gutters, and sidewalks, the installation is subject to inspection by the City prior to the final approval of the building permit. In the event the existing concrete curb, gutter and/or sidewalk is damaged or fails to meet acceptable grades established for the frontage or ADA requirements. The permittee must remove and replace those portions of curb, gutter and sidewalk found unacceptable prior to occupancy of the building improvements or finalization of the permit. B. Sidewalk New installations of sidewalk minimum widths must be based on pedestrian demand with an objective LOS of B and minimum LOS C. Exceptions to minimum required sidewalk widths to meet LOS analysis may be granted when the required sidewalk width is not consistent with neighborhood character and existing topography, street design, and density. Within the downtown planning area sidewalks shall have a minimum of 8 feet clear width. Otherwise, the standard minimum sidewalk width is 5 feet for detached and 6 feet when placed integral with curb and gutter. Sidewalk widths for commercial development may be required up to 7 feet detached, 12 feet integral. In areas where these widths cannot be maintained, sidewalk must have a minimum of 5 feet clear width. New Integral curb, gutter and sidewalk must be constructed without a cold joint between the curb and the sidewalk. Alternative surface materials may be approved on a case-by-case basis by the City Engineer to facilitate infiltration; however, ADA access requirements must be met. Sidewalks must slope to drainage facilities, either planting areas or gutters. Any existing feature in the sidewalk that is of a special, unique, unusual, or historic nature, as determined by the City, must not be replaced, removed, or altered without specific approval of the City Engineer. C. Curb Ramps Required Any installation of concrete curbs, gutters and sidewalks fronting a property at a public road intersection must include the installation of curb ramps that comply with the current Engineering Standards. Curb ramps must be installed at each corner of an intersection. Existing curb ramps fronting the property that do not meet current standards must be repaired or replaced as needed. No curb ramps may be constructed of Hot Mix Asphalt. Locate curb ramps in the most logical place to accommodate pedestrian crossings. Curb extensions or bulb-outs may be required to improve visibility and to reduce pedestrian crossing distances. Curb returns must be designed to minimize overly steep grades of curbs through the returns, to the satisfaction of the City Engineer. Generally, the grades of curb returns should not exceed the grades of the adjacent streets, and include accessible curb ramps. Additional landing area may be required at corners that are outside the planned right-of-way to accommodate curb ramps. Curb ramps must comply with the provisions and standards required by the City, State, and Federal Government. Any deviation from standards requires a signed design exception, approved by the City Engineer. D. Mission Style Sidewalk District: The following requirements apply to construction in the Mission Style Sidewalk District, which is defined in Resolution No. 9114 (2000 Series). See map in appendix. Mission Style Sidewalk, curb and gutter must be constructed per City Engineering Standard 4220. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 25 All driveways, curb ramps, tree wells and catch basins must conform to Mission Style Sidewalk requirements. All sign posts and parking meter posts must be relocated behind the tile row and be installed per City Engineering Standards. All new utility vaults, water meter boxes, and sewer cleanouts must be located behind the tile row or future tile row and must conform to City Standards. Wells, boxes, lids and covers must be stained or coated to match surrounding sidewalk. Stains and coatings must be submitted to the City for approval prior to application. Lids and covers may be cast iron or dark galvanized slip-resistant diamond-plate. Lids and covers in traffic areas must be traffic rated. All new installations of Mission Style Sidewalk must include Mission Style Curb and Gutter. Any existing feature in the sidewalk that is of a special, unique, unusual, or historic nature, as determined by the City, must not be replaced, removed, or altered without specific approval of the City Engineer. E. Repair and Replacement of Sidewalk Existing sidewalk fronting the property must be repaired and/or replaced as determined by the following criteria: 1. ADA maximum allowable sidewalk vertical displacement = 1/4-inch a. Vertical displacement of 3/4" or less – grind panel to provide smooth transition b. Vertical displacement greater than 3/4” – remove and replace panel 2. ADA maximum allowable sidewalk horizontal displacement = 1/2-inch a. Horizontal displacement of 1/2” to 3/4" – use appropriate patch filler b. Horizontal displacement greater than 3/4” – remove and replace 5-foot panel 3. Misalignment of curb face of 3/4" or greater – remove and replace section 4. Gutters subject to standing water 1/2" deep or greater and for a distance of 5-feet or more – remove and replace section. 3.1.11 Pedestrian Crossings A. General Crosswalks, either marked or unmarked, exist at all intersections of streets unless the local authority has implemented traffic controls to restrict the crossing of pedestrian traffic. For locations not controlled by: 1. traffic signals 2. yield signs 3. stop signs Marked crosswalks and in-ground lighting systems may only be considered after an engineering study is performed per the City’s crosswalk policy. If determined marked crosswalks are appropriate, installations shall be in conformance with the City’s crosswalk policy and Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. All pedestrian crossing must comply with the Pedestrian Crosswalk Policy. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 26 B. Re-Installation or Removal of Marked Crosswalks Re-installation of marked crosswalks may be evaluated as part of roadway resurfacing projects that cover pavement markings. Markings that do not meet the current design guidelines will be recommended for removal. The California Vehicle Code, Section 21950.5, requires a public hearing 30 days prior to the removal of a crosswalk. Any crosswalk scheduled for removal must be posted at the site ten days prior to the scheduled hearing. 3.1.12 Bike Facilities Bikeways must be incorporated into the design of any public improvements whenever a street is recommended for bikeway improvements in compliance with the adopted Bicycle Transportation Plan. Bikeway design must comply with the City’s adopted Bicycle Transportation Plan, Chapter 1000 of the HDM, MUTCD, and these Engineering Standards. The City may approve alternatives to sidewalks or bicycle lanes incorporated into the roadway section. Such alternate routes must be within a public right-of-way or public easement and must provide a level of access and pedestrian/cyclist safety equivalent to or better than provided by conventional locations. Where alternative pedestrian paths or bicycle paths are provided to the satisfaction of the City, the conventional sidewalks or bicycle lanes may be eliminated. Where curbside parking is provided, there must be safe pedestrian access to it. The alternative pedestrian path or bicycle paths must be logically related to conventional sidewalks or bike lanes to safely divert pedestrian/bicycle travel from roadway sections lacking roadside walks or bike lanes. The City may require improved walkways, in addition to sidewalks, through blocks more than nine hundred feet long to provide access to parks or public facilities. Minimum Class I and Multi Use Bikeway Facility Width Type Paved Width Notes and Additional Guidance Class 1 or Multi Use Path 12 ft Include 2 foot shoulders on either side of all Class I or mulit-use path facilities. Minimum Class II Bikeway Facility Width Type Paved Width Next to Parking Vehicles/Day 85% Motor Vehicle Speeds Longitudinal Slope Class II 5 ft (default) No < 10,000 < 35 mph < 4% 6.5 ft (Meet 1 Criterion) Yes ≥ 10,000 ≥ 35 mph ≥ 4% 8 ft (Meet 2 Criteria) Yes ≥ 10,000 ≥ 45 mph > 4% Class II Channelization (Use channelization when bike lane adjoins a right turn lane) 5 ft yes Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 27 * Facility width is measured from the centerline of stripe. New class II bikeways should include a 2’ buffer. Buffer may be included within the Class II bike lane paved width for widths greater than 6.5 ft. 3.1.13 Multi-Use Paths A. General Multi-use paths are multipurpose facilities suitable for serving a combination of: 1. recreational hikers 2. pedestrians 3. equestrians 4. bicyclists 5. other non-motorized vehicle users. Multi-use paths within the City right-of-way must be designed and constructed in accordance with these standards. Multi use path width must be a minimum of 12 feet wide with 2 foot shoulders on each side. B. ADA Compliant Multi-use paths must meet ADA requirements for pedestrian paths including those for surface, width and grade unless a nearby ADA compliant alternate path is readily available. C. HDM Compliant Multi-use paths that are reasonably anticipated to convey bicycle traffic must be designed either as a “Class I Bikeway” or as “Trail” and must comply with Chapter 1000 of the HDM. D. Attached and Detached Paths Where a multi-use path is to be constructed, it may be attached (i.e., integral with the edge of the roadway pavement) or detached (separated from the roadway by a landscaped parkway). When paths are attached, adequate space must be provided to accommodate 2’ shoulder in addition to space for street furniture and signs as needed. E. Crossing Locations Multi-use paths which cross public streets or roads should only cross at intersections. Midblock crossings may be considered if warrants provide justification. F. Path Termini Where Multi-use paths terminate at or cross public streets, paths shall be split with a landscape median or similar to restrict vehicular traffic. 3.1.14 Street Parking Parking is not allowed on regional highways. Parking on one or both sides is allowed on all other street types with Public Works Director approval. Where the proposed design allows parking in only certain areas, parking pockets, extended gutter construction, or other methods of clearly defining legal parking, are required. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 28 Parking areas may be used for infiltration of stormwater where suited to the site conditions. Design must be such as to prevent damage to adjacent roadway sections from infiltration, to the satisfaction of the City Engineer. The City may approve alternatives to the provision of curbside parking. Alternate parking may be allowed where the City determines the resulting street design is adequate for the type and extent of planned uses. Curbside parking reductions are encouraged in hillside developments to reduce grading, drainage run-off volumes, and pavement maintenance costs. If curbside parking is not provided, alternate parking on-site may be required depending on the development type and anticipated parking demand. 3.1.15 Bus Turnouts Where construction of a bus turnout is required by project conditions of approval, construct bus turnout in compliance with Engineering Standard 4920. 3.1.16 Cross Gutters Cross gutters are only allowed at intersections. Cross gutters are not allowed to cross highway/regional routes or arterial streets. 3.1.17 Sight Distance A. General No signs, hedges, shrubbery, vegetation, fence or other sight distance obstruction may be placed within the restricted area at the corner of any public road intersection, inside curve of any knuckle, or within the sight triangle of any common driveway. An obstruction is considered any such item which is higher than 2.5-feet above either the nearest pavement surface or the nearest traveled way. It is the responsibility of property owners to maintain sidewalks and multiuse paths fronting their property free from all encroachments. B. Public Road Intersections Sight distance at street intersections must comply with the Highway Design Manual Topic 405. 3.1.18 Roadway Clearances A. Lateral Clearance Excluding traffic signal equipment, the minimum lateral clearance is 5 feet for local street and 10 feet for all other street types. Lateral clearance is measure from the edge of travel way to the edge of an un-yielding fixed object. Examples of unyielding fixed objects include, but are not limited to: 1. Trees 2. utility poles 3. transformers or other above-ground facilities 4. sampling stations or other utility installations 5. signs mounted on standards without “break-away” provisions. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 29 Examples of yielding fixed objects which may be permitted within the lateral clearance include: 1. landscaping other than trees, 2. signs mounted on standards with “break-away” provisions 3. fire hydrants with “break-away” provisions. B. Vertical Clearance A minimum vertical clearance of not less than 15-feet, 18-feet preferred, must be provided above the travel way and shoulders, and 8-feet above sidewalks. 3.1.19 Right-of-Way A. General Right-of-way easement must be offered for dedication to the public and contain all elements of the roadway prism, as depicted in the Engineering Standards. Right-of-way must extend a minimum of 2’ beyond either the edge of: 1. roadway shoulder, 2. back of curb, or 3. back of sidewalk for the ultimate build out roadway section. B. Cut and Fill Slopes within the Right of Way Flatter slopes along the roadway provide: 1. improved appearance 2. reduced erosion 3. reduce maintenance needs 4. increase safety 5. increase public usability. Therefore, where practical slopes should be 5:1 or flatter within the right-of-way. Where flatter side slopes are not practical the following minimums must apply: 1. 4:1 minimum for a minimum distance of 15 feet from the edge of traveled way on roads with a design speed greater than 30 MPH. 2. 3:1 minimum for a minimum distance of 15 feet from the edge of traveled way on roads with a design speed greater than 25 MPH. 3. 2:1 minimum on roads with a design speed equal to or less than 25 MPH. The City may approve (via the design exception process) steeper slopes when the following conditions are demonstrated: 1. Proposed slopes have been determined to be stable by a geotechnical engineer 2. Adequate lateral clearance from the travel way is provided 3. Adequate erosion control can be established 4. Adequate access for maintenance is provided 5. Adequate sight distance is provided. 6. Adequate setback is provided from adjoining properties or adjoining facilities. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 30 7. Adequate drainage is provided. Where excavation or fill slopes continue beyond the street right-of-way, easements for the slopes may be required by the City. 3.1.20 Barricades, Barriers, and Railings Where improvements only cover a portion of the ultimate improvement and where an improved street is proposed to be extended in the future, the improvements must include a barricade at the end to serve as a warning to the public. The barricade must be constructed, erected, painted and signed in compliance with Engineering Standards and in compliance with the most current version of the MUTCD. Railings and barriers must be placed as needed to address: 1. roadway safety conditions, 2. accommodate pedestrian and bicycle traffic, 3. comply with ADA requirements 4. comply with OSHA requirements. The Project Engineer must evaluate the need to install such railings and barriers based on the following criteria: 1. Guardrails: Design guardrails in compliance with chapter 7 of Caltrans’ Traffic Manual. The designer must consider the elimination of obstacles prior to proposing the installation of guardrails. 2. Bikeways: Railings must be installed on structures and along the pavement edge where embankment slopes drop off steeper than 2:1 within the lateral clearance requirement. Railings must conform to the Caltrans Bridge Design Specifications Section 2.7.2 “Bicycle Railing”. 3. Pedestrian Railings: Railings are required for sidewalks or multi-use paths when: a. When a drop off exceeds 30-inches in height is within 5 feet. b. The adjacent slope exceeds 3:1. 4. For locations along the back of sidewalk where the drop-off is greater than 6-inches but less than 30- inches, a 6-inch warning curb must be installed along the edge in conformance with CalDAG. 5. Maintenance Work Surfaces: In any road right-of-way with retaining walls greater than 4-feet in height, but not subject to the bikeway or pedestrian requirements listed above, a railing system must be provided pursuant to OSHA Standard 1910.23(b) “Protection for wall opening and holes,” for the safety of maintenance workers. Railing systems must be, at a minimum, a Cable Type railing as detailed in the State Standard Plans. 3.1.21 Street Lighting A. General All significant projects including but not limited to: 1. major remodels/substantial remodels: Projects involving the substantial remodel of existing structures that’s estimated construction cost is in excess of 50 percent of the value of the existing building. 2. street widenings 3. multi-unit developments 4. high density residential are subject to providing lighting per the requirements of this standard. Additionally, any 1. major remodels 2. re-developments, or Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 31 3. significant sidewalk replacement projects in the downtown pedestrian lighting master plan area, must provide new pedestrian level lighting. See section 86-6.01 of the Standard Specifications for Luminaire information. See Engineering Standard 7520 for lighting circuit requirements. See Engineering Standard 7910 for pole requirements. B. Street Light Pole Foundation mounted steel poles are only allowed for replacement of an existing foundation mounted pole on the existing foundation or as approved by the City Engineer. Embedded steel poles are preferred and must be used for all other conditions. Street Lights installed in certain areas, such as the Downtown, may be required to be a specialized pole, as determined by the City. Double arm poles (Type 15D) must be used only in parking lots or areas where a maintenance vehicle can readily access the pole without traffic control. Otherwise use of double arm poles will only be allowed upon approval of the City Engineer and will only be authorized when no other option exists. C. Street Light Pole Placement Guidelines Residential Street Light Poles are to be placed on lot lines whenever possible. Street Lights Poles and trees should have a 20-foot minimum horizontal separation. Street Light Poles and shrubs should have a 5-foot minimum horizontal separation. Street / Intersection Width (1) Street Light Pole Spacing Pole Type and Location (3) Pole Arm Length (2)(3) Luminaire (4) Less than or equal to 40 feet Every 200 to 250 feet. Only one side of street. One light per intersection. Embedded Pole 18 inches behind curb face 8 feet Type 1 Greater than 40 feet Every 200 to 250 feet. Alternating sides of street. Two lights (min.) per intersection. Embedded Pole 18 inches behind curb face 8 feet Type 2 (1) Curb to Curb distance (2) Not including luminaire (3) Intersection lighting must be placed to minimize the likelihood of the pole being struck by turning traffic and may be set back from the curb face if needed and a longer arm installed to meet light placement requirements. (4) Refer to Section 86-6.01 “LED LUMINAIRES” of the Standard Specifications for Luminaire information. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 32 D. Street Light Service Electrical service points must be obtained from PG&E. When the lighting has been installed in conformance with the City’s requirements, the City will authorize PG&E to energize those lights installed as part of public improvements and will be owned and maintained by the City. Lights to be owned and maintained by a private party must be authorized to energize by that party. When service points are used for more than one light in series, an electrical design for the lighting circuit must be submitted to the City for approval. Voltage drop between the point of service and the end of each lighting circuit must not exceed 5 percent. All street lighting must be 120VAC. 3.1.22 Intersection Controls New intersections that would otherwise be controlled by all-way stop or signalization shall be controlled by roundabout or traffic circle except where operational or physical constraints render roundabout control infeasible. Roundabout design shall conform to FHWA roundabout design guidelines. All-way stop control and signalization shall only be considered if Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices warrants are satisfied for the respective control type. Satisfaction of warrants is only a prerequisite for consideration and shall not require the installation of either control. All-way stop control and Traffic Signals must comply with current design standards in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Design. Traffic signal conduit fill must not exceed 25%. 3.1.23 Streets Trees A. Definitions Rights of Way 1. Fee title: City owns the land on which the road is constructed. 2. Easement: Adjoining property owners own the land on which the road and sidewalk is constructed. 3. Street Tree Easement: Easement area adjacent to sidewalk or public utilities easement reserved for street tree installation. 4. Public Utility Easement: Easement area adjacent to sidewalk typically reserved for utilities and street tree installations. 5. Public Right-of-Way: Area reserved for road, curb, gutter, and sidewalk. This area width is typically from back or sidewalk on one side of roadway to back of sidewalk on the other side of the roadway. Tree Ownership 1. City tree: Any tree partially or wholly based in a “fee title” right-of-way. 6. City tree: Any tree within the public right-of-way, easement or fee title. 7. City tree: Any tree in designated street tree easement or public utility easement, including those trees planted as a condition of approved development. 8. Privately owned tree: Any tree not designated as City tree. Hazardous Tree – any tree that contains one or more of the following conditions: 1. Split trunk. 9. Cracked main branches. 10. Trunk leaning off vertical by at least 15 degrees. 11. Diseased or damaged trunk or main branches. 12. Over half of main branches have been broken off leaving skeleton or unsightly tree. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 33 13. Any condition that threatens the safety of the public or endangers City facilities. 14. Dead tree. Install one street tree per 35 feet of street frontage. Street trees may be grouped if necessary to avoid conflict with other improvements. Parkway areas which include trees must be a minimum of 5 feet wide. Parkways created in existing integral sidewalk areas will be handled on a case-by-case basis. B. Preservation of Existing Trees Existing trees within the area of any roadway public improvement must be preserved unless a tree removal permit has been issued. All trees within or near the lateral clearance requirements must be shown on the improvement plans. All trees planned to be removed or impacted by the improvements must be shown on the improvement plans. C. Responsibility for Trees 1. The City will maintain City trees (those within fee rights-of-way). 2. Privately owned trees must be maintained by the property owner. D. Procedures for Applying for Tree Removal within City Rights-of-Way Trees within Street Tree Easement or Public Utilities Easement adjacent to the right-of-way may be removed by the property owner at the property owner’s expense subject to the following the issuance of a Tree Removal Permit from the City. 3.2 Construction 3.2.1 Testing A. General Project testing must conform to the requirements of the City's Quality Assurance Program. B. Basement Soil Resistance factor “R” tests must be made by the Project Engineer as required by the City. The location of the tests within the area must be selected so that an average “R” value may be determined for the entire development area. “R” value tests may be required prior to approval of construction plans in cases where a road is anticipated to have a high forecast traffic volumes and traffic index or known poor quality basement soil. 4 Driveways and Off-Street Parking 4.1 General Driveways, driveway ramps, parking stalls, and aisles, including pavement, drainage, landscaping, screen fencing, and lighting, must conform to these standards and all requirements of the Municipal Code. All spaces and driveways must be designed to function properly. City inspection is required at appropriate times to ensure that all specifications are met. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 34 The grade break at the gutter should not exceed 20 percent at a driveway to prevent vehicles from dragging on the ground or sidewalk. Parking lots and driveways must be paved with an all-weather surface, such as asphaltic concrete (AC) pavement or Portland cement concrete (PCC) pavement. 4.2 Permits If the parking lot is not a part of a larger project, the builder must obtain a parking lot permit from the Community Development Department prior to constructing a new or modifying an existing parking lot. To obtain a permit, a plan for the project must be submitted to the Community Development Department. Any restriping or improvements, other than for maintenance purposes, to a parking lot also requires approval of a parking lot permit by the Community Development Department. 4.3 Plans Plans for the parking lots must conform to city standards and must show design for grading, paving, striping, signing, curbing, lighting, landscaping, and trash enclosures. 4.4 Driveways 4.4.1 Driveways on Arterial and Collector Street Driveways on arterial streets must conform to the following requirements: 1. Driveway access may must comply with section 3.1.8 “Access Management “of this standard. 2. Driveways may only be served by a break in a center median when such a break is not detrimental to the traffic flow. 3. Where possible, driveways must be located on cross streets or roads, rather than on arterial or collector streets. 4.4.2 Driveway Widths Driveways must be the same width as the curb opening (not including the transitions). They must be within the width limitations noted on Engineering Standard 2120. Exceptions may be granted in special circumstances by the Public Works Director or Community Development Director. Unless authorized by the: 1. Public Works Director 2. Property owner 3. Adjacent property owner 4. Community Development Director the driveway ramp and transition must lie entirely in front of the property served. The Fire Department may require greater driveway widths to allow for proper emergency vehicle access. 4.4.3 Number of Driveways Permitted Only one driveway is allowed per street frontage for residential property unless the frontage exceeds 70 feet; then a maximum of 30 percent of the frontage may be in driveways. The total width of all driveways to commercial or industrial property must not exceed 50 percent of the frontage of the property. Additional restrictions may be placed on driveways entering arterial streets in order to minimize the disruption to traffic. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 35 4.4.4 Abandoned Driveways As a condition of permit issuance, all abandoned driveways and driveway ramps on the same property must be removed, landscaped and the curb, gutter, and sidewalk properly restored. 4.4.5 Turnarounds – Deep Driveways Driveways which are over 100 feet long must have a turnaround at the end allowing cars to safely exit in a forward direction. In some instances, the Community Development Director may require turnarounds for shorter driveways. 4.4.6 Turnarounds – Single-Family House Driveways Single family residential developments generally do not require turnarounds unless there are extreme grade, fire hazard or alignment problems as determined by the Community Development Director or Fire Marshall. 4.4.7 Common-Access Driveways Common access driveways may be permitted: 1. On lots of record (existing before the effective date of this section) if the Community Development Director approves an administrative use permit; or 2. In new subdivisions where a common driveway is proposed as part of subdivision approval. A common-access driveway must meet all the following criteria: 1. The driveway must not be inappropriately located (for example, too close to a dwelling, play area or sloped bank). 2. It must be determined that there is no significant potential for conflict between the parties sharing the driveway because of its location, length, grade, usage, or other characteristics. Residential common-access driveways, those driveways that serve premises zoned or used for residential purposes must: 1. Provide an easement and covenant filed with the County Recorder setting forth driveway usage rights and responsibilities of each parcel serviced. This instrument must be in place prior to any permit issuance authorizing construction and at a minimum include the following provisions: 2. All affected property owners will be jointly responsible for the improvement and maintenance of all parts of the common-access driveway. 3. All parking on the commonly used portions of the driveway is prohibited. 4. Any affected property owner may use vehicle-removing authority granted private property owners in Section 22658 of the California Vehicle Code when any vehicle is parked in the common-access driveway and interferes with entry or access to a parcel it serves. 5. Property owners agree to hold the City harmless from all claims of damages or liability arising from any action to tow away vehicles pursuant to section “c” above. 6. If the easement or covenant is abandoned or dissolved, each lot previously served by the common- access driveway must be provided with standard access as required by these regulations. 7. The driveway must serve no more than four residential units unless special circumstances warrant the grant of an exception by the Community Development Director. 8. The Director or Planning Commission may add other requirements or conditions deemed necessary or appropriate. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 36 Commercial and industrial common access driveways, those that serve premises zoned or used for commercial or industrial purposes, may be subject to all conditions of residential common access driveways in addition to other requirements or conditions the City deems necessary or appropriate. 4.5 Off-Street Parking 4.5.1 General Location and design must comply with the Community Design Guidelines. A. Pavement Surfacing Parking lots and driveways must be paved with an all-weather surface, such as asphaltic concrete (AC) pavement or Portland cement concrete (PCC) pavement. The minimum thickness of pavement must be as specified in these standards. Base material must be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent. Compaction test reports must be submitted to the Community Development Department for verification of proper compaction. All motorcycle spaces within parking lots must be PCC pavement. If surfacing is allowed within the dripline of existing trees, porous pavement surfaces must be used if approved or required by the City Arborist. Alternative Permanent Paving: The Community Development Director may approve alternatives to AC or PCC paving surfaces on private property. The Director may approve such alternative paving to achieve aesthetic and environmental objectives, such as: 1. improved appearance, 2. increased water percolation, 3. reduced erosion and runoff, 4. increased aeration and water for tree roots, 5. reduced glare, 6. increased area available for landscaping upon finding that the alternative paving will provide public aesthetic or environmental benefits, and is equal to or better than AC or PCC paving in terms of: 1. public safety, 2. performance, 3. strength, 4. quality 5. durability Examples of permanent alternative paving surfaces include, but are not limited to: 1. interlocking pavers, 2. eco-block, 3. porous AC paving, 4. cobblestone, 5. or other equivalent material as determined by the Community Development Director. Alternative paving materials, when installed per manufacturer's specifications, must provide a suitable, all- weather, load-bearing surface to support passenger cars and light-duty trucks. Alternative paving surfaces for driveways or parking lots serving large commercial vehicles or fire trucks must be designed to accommodate a maximum vehicle weight of 45,000 lbs. Alternative paving materials over City utility easements will not be repaired or maintained by the City. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 37 B. Geometrics Turning Radii: The minimum allowable inside vehicle turning radius in parking and driveway areas must be 20 feet unless Fire Apparatus access is necessary, in which case the minimum inside radius must be 30.5 feet and the outside radius must be 46 feet or as required by the Fire Department. (Turning radii are not necessarily the radii of curbs around islands and other improvements.) Additional details are as shown on the standard drawing. Spaces Which Back onto Street: Except as noted in Tandem Parking Below, parking spaces which back directly onto the public street must be set back a minimum of 20 feet from the back of the sidewalk, regardless of the zoning of the property. No portion of any parking space or aisle, except driveways for ingress or egress, must be permitted in a required street yard setback area. Tandem Parking: Residential uses may have required spaces arranged in tandem subject to the approval of the Community Development Director. Single dwellings where tandem parking is approved may have one unenclosed parking space within the street yard (refer to Section 17.16.020 - Yards in the city's Zoning Regulations). Walls/Walkways/Entrances: A parking space facing a wall containing entrances and abutting a walkway to those entrances must be at least 4 feet clear of such a wall. Wheel Stops: Wheel stops are required if the space is headed into a wall, fence, landscaped area, building, walkway, or side of another auto. Additional wheel stops may be required by the Community Development Department. Concrete curbing may be substituted for wheel stops with the approval of the Community Development Director. Overhangs/Encroachments: Dimensions shown on the standards must be clear of overhangs or other encroachments which might interfere with vehicular access. Circulation areas must be provided at the ends of aisles. Maneuvering: Parking lots with more than six spaces must be designed so that automobiles will exit onto a public street in a forward direction and with no more than two maneuvers. A maneuver is defined as each motion in either a forward or backward direction. No space may be allowed that requires a vehicle to be maneuvered on the public sidewalk to exit. All spaces must be designed to be entered in one maneuver. A turnaround may be required if it's considered unsafe for a vehicle to back into the street by the Community Development Department and/or Public Works Director. Stall Sizes: All parking stalls must comply with the parking bay dimension standards for average sized cars as provided in the engineering standard details. Upon approval of an exception by the Community Development Director or Architectural Review Commission, a limited number of compact parking spaces may be allowed if justified by unusual circumstances such as saving a tree or using otherwise unusable space. Compact stalls, if used, must be designed and constructed in accordance with the engineering standard details. Accessible spaces must be designed and constructed in accordance with state and local requirements. Motorcycle Spaces: All motorcycle spaces must be designed and constructed in compliance with the engineering standards for motorcycle spaces. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 38 Bicycle Parking Standards: Bicycle parking must be provided in accordance with city zoning requirements. Bicycle parking may include racks and/or lockers to the approval of the Community Development Department. Truck Access: Commercial and industrial parking lots serving loading zones must be designed to accommodate access and circulation movement for on-site truck circulation. The Community Development Director or Public Works Director may require wider driveways and aisles as determined warranted. Safety Features: Additional requirements and guidelines for parking facility safety including: 1. design, 2. internal layout, 3. acceptable turning radii, 4. pavement slope, 5. vehicular and pedestrian circulation, and 6. other design features may be required by the Community Development Director. Visibility of and between pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists must be ensured when: 1. entering individual parking spaces, 2. circulating within a parking facility, 3. entering and exiting a parking facility To the extent possible, the parking facility must be designed so that primary pedestrian access to and from building entrances is along, rather than across parking aisles. Bicycle and automobile parking areas must be separated by a physical barrier or sufficient identification and distance to protect parked bicycles from damage by cars. Access for off-street parking facilities: The location and design of all entrances and exits onto public rights-of- way is subject to the approval of the Director of Public Works to ensure minimum interference with the traffic flow and adequate site clearance. Clearance for off-street parking facilities: All driveways must maintain a vertical clearance of not less than 12 feet. Where fire access is required a vertical clearance of not less than 13.5 feet is required. No encroachment into this vertical clearance may be permitted. C. Slope Parking spaces may not slope more than 5 percent in any direction and no less than 0.5 percent in the direction of drainage. A maximum of 10 percent slope in aisle and turn-around areas may be allowed. Swales of less than 1 percent slope must be concrete. Variations of these standards may be allowed by the Community Development Director for hardship situations providing safety and convenience concerns have been met. D. Drainage All parking facilities must be graded and drained to dispose of surface water, subject to the approval of the City Engineer. Oil separation or low impact development stormwater devices are required. Surfacing, curbing and drainage improvements must be sufficient to prevent the free flow of water onto adjacent properties or public streets or alleys, and to avoid standing pools of water within the parking facility. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 39 E. Marking and Signing Except for R-1 zoned and R-2 zoned property, entrances and exits that are one-way must be marked with an approved sign and pavement marking. Accessible, compact car, and loading spaces must be signed with pavement marking or markings on wheel stops in accordance with state code and local laws. The minimum dimensions of parking bays and maneuvering aisles must comply with Engineering Standard. The number and size of accessible spaces are specified in the California Building Code (part 2 of Title 24) Chapter 11. Each accessible parking space must comply with the most current version of Caltrans Standard Plan A90A or A90B.ADA spaces must be marked and signed to current requirements. F. Parking Lot Maintenance It is the duty of the property owner to maintain and repair the parking lot and related improvements in accordance with the above standards and any other conditions imposed at the time of approval. If the Community Development Department finds that the lot needs maintenance or repair, to ensure public safety and welfare, the City may pursue enforcement under the authorities of the Municipal Code. G. Loading Zones Off-street loading zones must be a minimum of 12 feet wide and 25 feet long. Loading zones must be designed so that trucks parking in them will not encroach onto the public right-of-way or into required parking spaces or driveways. Loading spaces designed for large trucks must have appropriately larger access to allow maneuvering without encroaching into landscape areas. Loading zones or areas may not encroach into fire lanes. Loading zones (spaces) must be provided in accordance with the city's zoning regulations (refer to sections 17.46.020 and 17.48.010). Additional loading zones may be required by the Community Development Department or Fire Department. H. Screening In Large Parking Lots: Any parking lot with more than six parking spaces adjoining a street must have the street frontage screened with a 3-foot (minimum) high wall, fence, and hedge consisting of 5-gallon or larger plants, or landscaped berm. The area between such screen and the street must be landscaped. Near Residential Development: A parking lot on a site adjacent to a residential development or next to a residential zone must be screened by a solid 6-foot-high wall, fence, or an existing mature hedge. I. Landscaping Planting Area Placement: Provide planting areas in all parking lots after each sixth parking space in any row and at the ends of each row of parking spaces. Landscape areas must have a minimum dimension of 4 feet by 4 feet; except, those areas with trees must have a minimum dimension of 8 feet by 8 feet. Landscape areas must be defined by concrete curbs or bands designed to minimize damage to pavement caused by irrigation of landscaping. Landscape areas defining ends of rows must extend to the minimum inside turn radius, must not conflict with an aisle or back-up area, nor be less than 4 feet in width. (Exceptions to this provision may be granted by the Community Development Department or the Architectural Review Commission.) Planting Arrangement: To prevent large expanses of pavement, parking lots must have at least 5 percent of their surface devoted to landscaping (exclusive of setbacks) arranged in an appropriate and effective manner. Additional landscape area may be required by the Community Development Department or the Architectural Review Commission. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 40 Maintenance: In all zones, required street yard areas must be landscaped and perpetually maintained. All landscape planting must be maintained and dead plants must be replaced as necessary. Drought tolerant planting must be used in accordance with the city's landscape standards for water conservation. J. Landscape Preservation Planting areas which may be hit by automobiles or where drainage control is necessary must be defined by a 6-inch curb or berm of reinforced concrete, brick, or block. A header-board protected by parking bumpers or other suitable permanent material may be approved by the Community Development Department. Header boards, walls or berms must also be provided between the back of a City sidewalk and a planting area to prevent soil from washing onto the sidewalk. K. Temporary Parking Lots Parking lots and driveways which will be used for one year or less may be developed with Community Development Director approval. The Director may require a recorded agreement and/or cash surety to guarantee: 1. removal of the temporary parking 2. site restoration 3. and clean-up and/or repair of City streets Such temporary facilities need not provide landscaping, striping and wheel stops as would otherwise be required for permanent facilities, but they must meet all other parking and driveway design standards (parking space and driveway dimensions, aisle widths, and so on). Temporary parking lots and driveways must have an all-weather, dust-free surface with sufficient compacted base material or undisturbed grade to safely accommodate the intended use. Examples of temporary paving surfaces include, but are not limited to: 1. compacted "redrock" or decomposed granite; 2. compacted road base over compacted natural grade; 3. other temporary surface which the Director determines to provide an all-weather load-bearing surface equivalent to the above materials in terms of safety, maintenance, and appearance. Gravel or similar materials must not be used where average cross-slopes exceeds 5 percent. L. Irrigation Landscape areas must have a permanent underground irrigation system. Irrigation must provide uniform precipitation for overhead areas and adequate water to maintain healthy plants. Check valves are required at the toe of all slopes to prevent low head drainage. Overspray must be minimized to prevent runoff, and shall be consistent with the City’s water conservation measures. M. Lighting Lighting must comply with Community Design Guidelines 2010 Section 6.1.C. 5. Drainage 5.1 Design Standards 5.1.1 Requirements A. General All new development or redevelopment must comply with the criteria and standards set forth in the: 1. Waterways Management Plan – Drainage Design Manual, 2. applicable area specific plans, Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 41 3. and the Post-Construction Stormwater Management Requirements for Development Projects in the Central Coast Region, adopted by the Central Coast Regional Water Quality Control Board, and included in their appendices. Where requirements conflict, the stricter requirement applies. Stormwater Control Plan, and Operation and Maintenance Plan are required prior to final approvals. Stormwater management facilities may be built into the right-of-way, including medians, traffic circles, and parkways, subject to approval by the City Engineer. Where stormwater management features are built into the right-of-way, water must be managed to prevent damage to the roadway structural integrity. B. Provide for Overland Escape All components of drainage systems in public improvements must be evaluated to consider the effect of failure of individual components and identify the route of overland escape. The evaluation must identify any necessary measures to prevent erosion or flooding along this route. C. Conveyance of Drainage in Urban Areas Drainage must be conveyed in surface facilities such as: 1. bioswales, 2. street gutters 3. cross-gutters 4. basins to the maximum extent possible. Flows which cannot be conveyed within the capacity of these facilities may be conveyed in culverts or storm drains. D. Sidewalk Underdrains No concentrated flows may be permitted across the surface of any sidewalk. Inlets or under-sidewalk drains must be used in such situations. 5.1.2 Alignment of Drainage Facilities A. Locate within Road or Public Easement Drainage facilities accepting runoff from public streets or other public areas must be in a public street or within a public drainage easement. These easements must be offered for dedication to the public. B. Avoid Combining with Utility Easements Drainage easements must be used for drainage purposes exclusively and not combined with easements required for other public utility purposes. C. Easement Width Easements for culverts and drainage facilities must be a minimum width of 15-feet. All such easements must provide access and future maintenance working areas. Easements must be along or adjacent to property lines and outside areas of proposed or existing structures. When drainage pipes are 24-inch in diameter or greater, or trenches exceeding 5-feet in depth, provide additional drainage width to accommodate future maintenance needs. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 42 D. Storm Drain Alignment Storm drain pipes must be parallel with the centerline of streets. The design must avoid: 1. Meandering 2. Offsetting 3. unnecessary angular changes. No angular changes more than 10 degrees may be made without a junction structure. No single change, even with a junction structure, may exceed 90 degrees. E. Cross Culvert Alignment Cross culverts must be aligned with the natural water course and which might not be perpendicular to the road way. The culvert must be sized and sloped to not cause downstream erosion. 5.1.3 Drainage Structures A. Manholes Standard precast concrete manholes must be used wherever feasible. When cases arise where special manholes or junction boxes are required, the design must be prepared by a Civil Engineer and submitted to the City for review. Manholes must conform to the following requirements: 1. Place manholes, at a minimum, every 500 feet. 2. Place manholes at junction points. 3. Place manholes at changes in gradient 4. Place manholes when pipes change size. 5. On curved pipes with radii of 200 feet to 400 feet, place manholes at the BC or EC of the curve and on 300-foot maximum intervals along the curve. B. Catch Basin Catch basins must conform to the following requirements: 1. Design capacity and spacing of drainage inlets so the spread of water roadway design event does not inundate the traveled way see Section 5.1.2.A for design parameters. 2. Sufficient drainage capacity must be provided within the road right-of-way and other drainage facilities to convey a 100-year storm without damage to any structures. 3. No more than 1.0 cubic feet per second may be allowed to “bypass” a midblock inlet. No more than 0.3 cubic feet per second may be allowed to “bypass” a curb return at an intersection. 4. Sheet flow across a road must not exceed 0.1 cubic feet per second. C. Junction Boxes Junction boxes must conform to the following requirements: 1. Junction boxes may be construction per: a. Engineering Standard Storm Drain Manholes, b. Caltrans Standard Plans for Junction Boxes, or c. individual design prepared and stamped by a Civil Engineer that includes the design, structural calculations, and design loading. 2. The inside dimension of junction boxes must be such as to provide a minimum of 3-inches clearance on the outside diameter of the largest outfall pipe. 3. Standard manhole entrance. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 43 D. Other Structures The following requirements apply to drainage structures, as required by the City: 1. Trash racks must be provided where in the opinion of the City they are necessary to prevent clogging of culverts, storm drains, or to provide safety to the public. 2. Guardrail or pedestrian/worker railings may be required by the City at culverts, headwalls, and box culverts and on steep side-slopes. 5.1.4 Bioretention Basins A. General In addition to flood control basins, bioretention basins can be used to improve storm water quality and reduce flooding impacts in storms. B. Design Criteria The following must be considered and presented in the design of bioretention basins and bioswales. 1. Lateral distance to vehicle travel lanes, bike lanes, and pedestrian paths 2. Vertical drop offs adjacent to travel lanes, bike lanes, and pedestrian paths 3. Long term percolation rate 4. Landscape establishment and irrigation 5. Maintenance practicality including landscape maintenance and maintenance access 6. Porosity of engineered soil Bioretention Soil Media (BSM) C. Materials 1. Bioretention Soil Media (BSM). Use a mixture of sand and compost conforming to the post construction handbook or other source approved by the City 2. Filter fabric is prone to clogging and may not normally be used within the right-of-way. 3. In lieu of filter fabric, use gravel filter conforming to Caltrans Class 2 Permeable Material per Section 68 of the State standards or approved equal. D. Maintenance Perpetual maintenance of bioretention basins and landscaping is the responsibility of the Developer, unless the maintenance responsibility is assumed by a public entity or a property owners’ association. 5.1.5 Bioswales A. Facility Design and Dimensions 1. Bottom width: Provide 2’ wide minimum flat bottom for facilities with side slopes and longitudinal slope. 2. Allowable standing water duration: 72 hours. 3. Planter minimum widths are typically associated with their application. Considerations influencing minimum widths include: 4’ minimum for planters with trees, 2’ minimum for planters without trees 4. Ponding depth - Min. 6", max. 12" 5. Planter depth – (from adjacent pedestrian walking surface to facility finished elevation/planting surface) is based on desired ponding plus freeboard, but also relates to planter width. Planters can be deeper if they are wider, and need to be shallower as they narrow. This is a pedestrian perception and safety issue. Some recommended width to depth guidelines are: Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 44 Planter Width Max. Planter Depth Greater than 5 feet 16 inches 4 – 5 feet 12 inches 3 – 4 feet 10 inches 2 – 3 feet 8 inches B. Slopes and Grades 1. Side slope: 4:1 or 3:1 maximum with a minimum 12-inch-wide shoulder (2% slope toward facility) adjacent to pedestrian use or curb. 2. Longitudinal slope: Maximum 6% longitudinal slope of bottom. Erosion and movement of soil and mulch intensifies with increased longitudinal slope, minimize longitudinal slope. Stair stepping planters on a slope to provide flat bottomed cells separated by check dam/weir overflows can provide more storage and infiltration than a sloped facility. 3. Grades on opposite sides within a facility should be similar to optimize ponding across the entire basin/cell. C. Infrastructure 1. Inlet curb cut design selection should be based on application considerations: a. Sloped sided or flat/planter facility b. Curb and gutter adjacent to facility or separated by pedestrian sidewalk 2. Sidewalk edge type selection should be based on application considerations: a. New or retrofit b. Sloped sided or flat/planter 3. Sidewalk Curb: flat/planter requires 4” min. height curb adjacent to sidewalk for pedestrian safety. Provide 4 to 6-inch-wide sidewalk curb notch when sidewalk drains to planter. Provide as many notches as required to convey flow. 4. Energy dissipation: provide aggregate splash pads at inlets per inlet details. Provide 6” depth, 3" – 6" rounded, washed cobble. For sloped sided facilities where inlet flow velocity is high, extend cobble into facility, but avoid excessive or decorative use. 5. Overflow structure: Provide overflow structure or connect to approved discharge point. D. Soil, Aggregate and Mulch 1. Aggregate layer: Where an aggregate layer is included in the design use Caltrans Class 2 Permeable. Caltrans Class 2 Permeable does not require an aggregate filter course between the aggregate storage layer and the bioretention soil media above. When Caltrans Class 2 Permeable is not available, substitute Caltrans Class 3 Permeable. Class 3 Permeable requires an overlying 3” deep layer of ¾” (No. 4) open graded aggregate (between Class 3 and bioretention soil media above). Use a minimum depth of 12 inches. 2. Bioretention Soil Media (BSM): use Bay Area Stormwater Management Agencies Association (BASMAA) Specification of Soils for Biotreatment or Bioretention Facilities (Attachment L). Provide pre-mixed BSM, do not mix onsite. Provide a minimum of 24 inches of BSM depth. Where aggregate layer is used and trees are specified, replace aggregate with increased BSM depth in tree planting locations. 3. Filter fabric - do not use fabric between BSM and aggregate layer 4. Provide mulch depth of 2 to 3 inches. Mulch use optional below ponding high water mark. Do not apply mulch in ponding zone just prior to or during rainy season. Mulch non-floating mulch. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 45 E. Planting, Irrigation, and Underdrains 1. Irrigation: Provide irrigation for plant establishment (2-3 years), and supplemental irrigation during periods of prolonged drought. Provide separate zone for connection to water supply 2. Planting: Do not locate plants at inlets. Consider mature growth to determine planting layout and avoid future blockage of inlets by plants. 3. Underdrain: Use 4” diameter, PVC SDR 35 perforated pipe. Install underdrain with holes facing down. Underdrain discharge elevation must be near top of aggregate layer. Underdrain slope may be flat. Provide capped, threaded PVC cleanout for underdrain, 4" min. dia. with sweep bend. 5.1.6 Channel and Swales No diversion to roadside ditches will be allowed from natural drainage courses. A. Types Open channels may be: 1. natural watercourses 2. earthen channels 3. swales 4. bioswales or channels or swales lined with the materials such as those listed below. Channels lined with impermeable surfaces such as: 1. concrete 2. mortar 3. pipe-like materials are discouraged and may only be used where permeable linings are impractical. Lining materials must be selected that: 1. are non-erosive under velocities calculated in the design storm 2. provide ease of ongoing maintenance Where linings are required, they must extend to the full height of freeboard, as defined below. B. Freeboard and Side Slopes Required Channels or swales may be required to be lined to an elevation of at least 1.0-foot above the design hydraulic gradient. The side slopes for channel or swale must not exceed 2:1 or 3:1 in sandy soils. Provide a minimum of 1-foot of freeboard at design capacity. C. Improvement Plans Provide typical sections and profile of the existing and proposed channels for a minimum of 500-feet each side of the development to establish an average profile grade through the development. D. Velocity Requirements Channels or swales must comply with the following requirements: 1. Minimum velocity for channels or swales flowing full, with freeboard, must be 2 feet per second. 2. Minimum velocity in bioswales may be less than 2 feet per second but must provide for positive drainage. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 46 3. The maximum velocity in constructed unlined earth channels or swales must not exceed that which would cause erosion; which is typically less than 4 feet per second. 4. The maximum velocity concrete lined channels must not exceed 10 feet per second. E. Natural Waterways For natural waterways, the design flow may be allowed in the natural overflow area if a drainage easement is provided, which will include the overflow area, and freeboard as specified above exists between the water surface and adjacent ground. 5.1.7 Culverts and Storm Drains A. Minimum Diameter Minimum pipe diameter allowable on any storm drain or culverts that are maintained by the City is 18-inches. A lesser size may be approved for privately maintained facilities. B. Velocity Requirements Culverts must comply with the following requirements: 1. Minimum design velocity must be 2 feet per second when conduit is flowing at the 2-year design discharge. 2. Maximum design velocity must not exceed 15 feet per second when culvert is flowing at the Primary Design Storm. 5.1.8 Outfalls A. Culvert Energy Dissipaters Design energy dissipaters in compliance with the HDM Chapter 870, Channel and Shore Protection Erosion Control. Show the following items on the plans: 1. Stable rock size (weight) 2. Rock Slope Protection (RSP) class 3. Dissipater trench dimensions 4. Rock placement method 5. RSP fabric type Culvert energy dissipaters must be designed for the flow from the Design Storm. Rock slope protection gradation must conform to Section 72 of the State Standard Specifications. 5.1.9 Bridges A. Design Criteria Design must conform to the requirements of current California Department of Transportation and AASHTO guidelines and standards. Any variation from standards must be approved in writing by the City Engineer. Bridges must be clear spans. All bridge designs require approval by the City’s Architectural Review Commission. Bridge design must account for impacts of future development considering areas within the City’s adopted urban reserve line. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 47 Submittals must include the full construction plans for the bridge including: 1. details 2. geotechnical report including log of test borings, corrosivity testing of the soil, and testing for the presence of naturally occurring asbestos 3. scour calculations that indicate adequate structure depth to prevent scour damage or undermining for the life of the structure 4. design calculations including design loads 5. hydrologic and hydraulic calculations A hard copy and an electronic PDF format copy for archiving must be submitted for documents. Structures with a required span between 19 feet and 20 feet must be constructed with a minimum span of 20 feet. Clear span bridges must be constructed in lieu of closed culverts whenever possible and a natural channel maintained. Closed culverts will be allowed where site constraints prevent a bridge from being constructed with enough clearance to allow for required storm passage with 12 inches of freeboard. Authorization to build culverts in lieu of clear span bridges must be approved by the City Engineer and regulatory agencies. Closed culverts must be upsized to increase the depth of the culvert to allow the placement of 12 inches of natural gravels in the bottom of the culvert. B. Materials Vehicle bridges must be constructed of a material which requires no maintenance for the first 30 years of its life. Concrete is the preferred material for construction; however, alternative materials may be approved by application in writing to the City Engineer with sufficient documentation to support an alternative including information showing the alternative is a superior material, or that concrete will not provide the desired life or freedom from maintenance in the given conditions. Vehicle bridges may use a pre-approved prefabricated structure. Pedestrian and bicycle bridges may be furnished as prefabricated structures, including “weathered” steel. The material must be approved prior to the submittal for the structure itself. New bridge decks may not be overlaid with asphalt unless authorized by the City Engineer. Where the City approves an overlay on the deck, an approved waterproof membrane must be installed between the deck surface and the overlay. Waterproof or sealing membranes such as methacrylate seals may be required prior to acceptance where cracking of the deck is observed. C. Barrier Rails Barrier rails for vehicle crossings must meet current AASHTO guidelines for crash ratings. Barrier rails for pedestrians on private property adjacent to the Right of Way must comply with the most current California Building Code. D. Bicycle and Pedestrian Facilities Vehicle bridges must be of adequate width to accommodate, bike lanes and sidewalks on both sides. Bike lanes and sidewalks must be constructed regardless of the presence of those facilities on the abutting roadway. E. Design Life All structures must be designed for a minimum 50-year service life. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 48 5.1.10 Fencing All open channel drainage facilities and drainage basins, must provide fencing as follows: 1. Constructed channels, swales and basins with side slopes five to one (5:1) or flatter and depths less than 3.0-feet do not require fencing. 2. Natural channels do not require fencing. 3. Any required fence must be located no more than 4-inches within the required easement lines and must provide sufficient room for maintenance vehicles. 4. Fencing must be 42 inches tall. 5.2 Post Construction Stormwater Compliance 5.2.1 Performance Requirements A. Performance Requirement No. 1: Site Design and Runoff Reduction Projects that create and/or replace 2,500 square feet or more of impervious surface must: 1. Limit disturbance of creeks, wetlands, riparian habitats and provide adequate setback 2. Limit clearing and grading of native vegetation and conserve natural areas, existing trees, and soils. Avoid excessive grading and disturbance of vegetation and soils by conforming the site layout along natural grades. 3. Minimize impervious surfaces by concentrating improvements on the least-sensitive portions of the site, leave the remaining land in a natural undisturbed state. Define the development envelope and protected areas, identifying areas that are most suitable for development and areas to be left undisturbed. 4. Minimize stormwater runoff by implementing one or more of the following site design measures: a. Direct roof runoff into cisterns or rain barrels for reuse b. Direct roof runoff onto vegetated areas c. Direct runoff from sidewalks, walkways, and patios onto vegetated areas d. Direct runoff from driveways and uncovered parking lots onto vegetated areas e. Construct project using permeable surfaces B. Performance Requirement No. 2: Water Quality Treatment Projects that create and/or replace 5,000 square feet or more of impervious surface must treat stormwater runoff from existing, new, and replaced impervious surfaces on sites where runoff from existing impervious surfaces which cannot be separated from runoff from new and replaced impervious surfaces. Water Quality Treatment must be treated onsite and designed to treat stormwater runoff equal to the volume of runoff generated by the 85th percentile 24-hour storm event, of 1.1 to 1.3 inches depending on location in the City. Water Quality Treatment may implement a treatment system that use multiple methods to comply with Water Quality Treatment requirements. The Water Quality Treatment system must first implement Low Impact Development Treatment Systems, then may implement Biofiltration Systems, and then finally may implement Non-Retention Based Treatment Systems. Projects subject to Performance Requirement No. 2 must also include design strategies required by Performance Requirement No. 1. Provide storage for the 85th percentile 24-hour storm event. See Performance Requirement No. 3: Runoff Retention for information to volumetric design water quality volume. Provide Biofiltration treatment systems that comply with the following design parameters: Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 49 1. Must prevent erosion, scour and channeling within the biofiltration treatment system from a rain event of 0.2 inches per hour intensity. 2. Provide a minimum surface water storage volume equal to the biofiltration treatment systems surface area times a depth of 6 inches. 3. Provide a minimum of 24 inches in depth of Bioretention Soil Media (BSM) equivalent to soil media as specified in Attachment L. 4. Proper plant selection for facility. 5. Provide a minimum subsurface gravel storage layer of 12 inches for entire biofiltration systems surface area. 6. Provide underdrain or French drain at the top of gravel layer. 7. Do not compact soils below the biofiltration facility. Rip and loosen soils if previously compacted. 8. Do not use liners or barriers. 9. Hydraulic capacity that collectively achieves at least one of the following criteria: a. Volumetric Design: Provide storage for the 85th percentile 24-hour storm event. b. Flow Based: Provide capacity at a minimum of a rain intensity of 0.2 inches per hour. C. Performance Requirement No. 3: Runoff Retention Projects that create and/or replace 15,000 square feet or more of impervious surface must retain runoff for optimal management of watershed processes. Projects subject to Performance Requirement No. 3 must also include design strategies required by Performance Requirement No. 2 and 1. Replaced impervious surface, may receive a 50 percent reduction when calculating the volume of runoff subject to Runoff Retention Performance Requirements. Retention must meet the following performance requirements: 1. Prevent offsite discharge from events up to the 95th percentile 24-hour rainfall event. 2. Achieve retention by: a. optimizing soil infiltration b. storage c. rainwater harvesting d. evapotranspiration. Provide a site assessment document that identify opportunities and constraints to implement LID Stormwater Control Measures for development site. Site assessment document must review and document the following site characteristics: 1. Site topography 2. Hydrologic features including contiguous natural areas, wetlands, watercourses, seeps, or springs 3. Depth to seasonal high groundwater 4. Locations of groundwater wells used for drinking water 5. Depth to an impervious layer such as bedrock 6. Presence of unique geology 7. Geotechnical hazards 8. Documented soil and/or groundwater contamination 9. Soil types and hydrologic soil groups 10. Vegetative cover/trees 11. Run-on characteristics (source and estimated runoff from offsite which discharges to the project area) Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 50 12. Existing drainage infrastructure for the site and nearby areas including the location of municipal storm drains 13. Structures including retaining walls 14. Utilities 15. Easements 16. Covenants 17. Zoning/Land Use 18. Setbacks 19. Open space requirements 20. Other pertinent overlay(s) Delineation of discrete Drainage Management Areas (DMAs) to support a decentralized approach to stormwater management. Provide a map or diagram dividing the entire project site into discrete DMAs. Account for the drainage from each DMA using measures identified as: 1. Self-treating area 2. Self-retaining area 3. Area draining to self-retaining area 4. Area draining to Stormwater Control Measure (SCM) When the applicant has demonstrated through their Stormwater Control Plans that use of Site Design Measures of Performance Requirement No. 1 have been implemented to the maximum extent practicable, the use of Structural Stormwater Control Measures may be used. The Structural Stormwater Control Measure must be designed for water quality treatment and flow control may be used to comply with Performance Requirement No. 3. Stormwater Control Measures must be designed as to optimize retention and result in Structural Control Measures that are small-scale, decentralized facilities, that are designed to infiltrate, evapotranspirate, filter, or capture and use stormwater. Determine sizing of runoff retention design based on volumetric basis for the 95 percentile 24-hour rainfall event. Retention Tributary Area must be calculated for each individual Drainage Management Areas as follows: 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎𝑃𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑙𝑟𝑖𝑙𝑙 𝑃𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑟𝑟𝑎𝑟𝑦 𝐴𝑟𝑎𝑎=𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎𝐷𝑙𝑟𝑖𝑟𝑎 𝑃𝑟𝑙𝑖𝑎𝑎𝑟 𝐴𝑟𝑎𝑎−𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎𝑃𝑙𝑎𝑖𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑙𝑟 𝑃𝑙𝑎𝑙𝑟𝑎𝑎 𝐴𝑟𝑎𝑎𝑟− 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎𝐼𝑙𝑙𝑎𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑙𝑟𝑟 𝑃𝑟𝑟𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝐴𝑟𝑎𝑎𝑟 𝑟ℎ𝑎𝑟 𝐷𝑖𝑟𝑎ℎ𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑎 𝑟𝑙 𝐼𝑙𝑎𝑖𝑙𝑟𝑟𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑙𝑙 𝐴𝑃𝑎𝑎𝑟 Calculating the 85th Percentile 24-hour event used for Water Quality Calculations and the 95th Percentile 24- hour event used for Retention Volume is completed as follows: Compute the Runoff Coefficient “C” for each DMA using the equation: 𝐶=0.858�ℎ3 −0.78�ℎ2 +0.774�ℎ+0.04 Where “i” is the fraction of the tributary area that is impervious Calculate the volumetric design quantity as follows (area in square feet, depth in inches): 𝑉𝑙𝑙𝑟𝑙𝑒𝑊𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑟 𝑃𝑟𝑎𝑙𝑖𝑟𝑦=𝐶 × 𝐶𝑒𝑙𝑟�𝑃𝑎𝑖𝑙𝑎𝑎𝑙𝑙 𝐷𝑟𝑎𝑙𝑟 × 1 𝑒𝑙𝑙𝑟 12 �ℎ𝑙𝑐�𝑒𝑟 × 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎𝑃𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑙𝑟𝑖𝑙𝑙 𝑃𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑟𝑟𝑎𝑟𝑦 𝐴𝑟𝑎𝑎 Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 51 Compute the Retention Volume in cubic feet (area in square feet): 𝑉𝑙𝑙𝑟𝑙𝑒𝑃𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑙𝑟𝑖𝑙𝑙=𝐶 × 1.8 �ℎ𝑙𝑐�𝑒𝑟 × 1 𝑒𝑙𝑙𝑟 12 �ℎ𝑙𝑐�𝑒𝑟 × 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎𝑃𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑙𝑟𝑖𝑙𝑙 𝑃𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑟𝑟𝑎𝑟𝑦 𝐴𝑟𝑎𝑎 The County of Santa Barbara has developed a sizing calculator that may be used and downloaded at the following site: http://www.sbprojectcleanwater.org/development.aspx?id=76 D. Performance Requirement No. 4: Peak Management Projects that create and/or replace 22,500 square feet or more of impervious surface must retain runoff for the optimal management of watershed processes. Projects subject to Performance Requirement No. 4 must also include design strategies required by Performance Requirement No. 3, 2 and 1. Post-development peak flows, discharged from the site, must not exceed pre-project peak flows for the 2 through 10-year storm events. E. Impervious Surface Correction Factors Surface must not broadly be characterized as completely pervious. Use correction factors to calculate equivalent impervious surface area for Post Construction Stormwater Runoff Requirements. Surface Equivalent Impervious Surface Factor Roof 1.0 Concrete 1.0 Asphalt 1.0 Porous Concrete 0.1 Porous Asphalt 0.1 Grouted Paver Unit 1.0 Solid Paver Unit set in Sand 0.5 Crushed Aggregate 0.1 Landscape 0.1 5.2.2 Stormwater Control Plan The applicant must provide a Stormwater Control Plan that clearly provides engineering analysis of all Water Quality Treatment, Runoff Retention, and Peak Flow Management controls for projects subject to those performance requirements. All reports must be completed by either a Registered Civil Engineer or Qualified Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan Developer (QSD). A. Minimum Requirements for Content 1. Project information including: a. project name; b. location; c. parcel numbers; d. applicant contact information; Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 52 e. land use information; f. site area; g. area of existing impervious surfaces, h. area of new impervious surfaces i. area of replaced impervious surfaces j. applicable PCR Performance Requirements 2. Narrative description of site features, opportunities and constraints for stormwater control. 3. Narrative description of site design characteristics that protect natural resources including endangered species habitat, vegetation, archaeological resources, natural drainage features, and design features that minimize imperviousness of project and manage runoff from impervious areas. 4. Tabulation of proposed pervious and impervious DMAs, showing self-treating areas, self-retaining areas, areas draining to self-retaining areas, and areas tributary to each LID facility. 5. Proposed sizes, including supporting calculations, for each stormwater facility. 6. Narrative description of each DMA and explanation of how runoff is routed from each impervious DMA to a self-retaining DMA or stormwater control facility. 7. Description of site activities and potential sources of pollutants. 8. Table of pollutant sources and source control measure(s) used to reduce pollutants to the maximum extent practicable. 9. Description of signage for bioretention facilities. 10. General maintenance requirements for bioretention facilities and site design features. 11. Means by which facility maintenance will be financed and implemented in perpetuity. 12. Statement accepting responsibility for interim operation & maintenance of facilities. B. Exhibits 1. Existing natural hydrologic features (depressions, watercourses, relatively undisturbed areas) and significant natural resources. 2. Proposed design features and surface treatments used to minimize imperviousness and reduce runoff. 3. Existing and proposed site drainage network and connections to drainage off-site. 4. Entire site divided into separate Drainage Management Areas (DMAs). Each DMA has a unique identifier and is characterized as self-retaining (zero-discharge), self-treating, or draining to a LID facility. 5. Proposed locations and footprints of stormwater control facilities. 6. Potential pollutant source areas 5.2.3 Operations and Maintenance The Applicant must develop, implement and provide the City an Operations and Maintenance Plan and Maintenance Agreements that clearly establish responsibility for all Water Quality Treatment, Runoff Retention, and Peak Flow Management controls for projects subject to those performance requirements. A. Operations and Maintenance Plan The Operations and Maintenance Plan must include, at minimum: 1. A site map identifying all Stormwater Control Measures requiring Operations and Maintenance practices to function as designed. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 53 2. Operations and Maintenance Procedures for each structural stormwater control measure including, but not limited to, Low Impact Design facilities, retention and detention basins, and manufactured or propriety devices operations and maintenance. 3. Short-and long-term maintenance requirements, recommended frequency of maintenance, and estimated cost for maintenance. B. Maintenance Agreement The Applicant must provide a signed statement accepting responsibility for the Operations and Maintenance of the installed Storm Water Control Measures. The Applicant must include written conditions in the sales, lease agreements, deed, CCRs, HOA, or any other legally enforceable mechanism that require the assumed responsibility for the Operations and Maintenance of Stormwater Control Facilities. Additionally, the signed statement must include the following information: 1. The location and address of Storm Water Control Facilities 2. Completion dates of the following milestones 3. Construction 4. Field verification of Stormwater Control Facilities 5. Final Project approval/occupancy 6. Party responsible for O&M 7. Source of funding for O&M 8. Statement indicating the Storm Water Control Facilities are Maintained as required in the Operations and Maintenance Plan and facilities continues to function as designed or have been repaired or replaced 9. Statement describing any vector or nuisance problems. C. Maintenance Notification The Owner/Applicant must provide a signed statement notifying the City of all maintenance of the installed Storm Water Control Measures. Additionally, the signed statement must include the following information: 1. The location and address of Storm Water Control Facilities 2. Completion date of the maintenance activities 3. Party responsible for O&M 4. Source of funding for O&M 5. Statement indicating the Storm Water Control Facilities are Maintained as required in the Operations and Maintenance Plan and facilities continues to function as designed or have been repaired or replaced 6. Statement describing any vector or nuisance problems. 5.3 Groundwater 5.3.1 Subsurface Groundwater Drainage: Underground dewatering improvements (such as retaining wall sub-drains or groundwater collection system) must not deposit collected groundwater or spring water to the gutter or other surface drainage facility. Such systems must be designed to retain the water on-site or deposit the collected water to an approved collection system. 5.3.2 Source Control: (per 2013 State General Stormwater Permit Section E.12.d) Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 54 Projects with pollution generating activities and sources must be designed to implement operation or source control measures consistent with recommendations from the California Stormwater Quality Association Handbook for New Development and Redevelopment or equivalent, including: 1. Accidental spills or leaks 2. Interior floor drains 3. Parking / storage areas and maintenance 4. Indoor and structural pest control 5. Landscape / outdoor pesticide use 6. Pools, spas, ponds, decorative fountains and other water features 7. Restaurants, grocery stores, and other food service operations 8. Refuse areas 9. Industrial processes 10. Outdoor storage of equipment or materials 11. Vehicle and equipment cleaning, repair, and maintenance 12. Fuel dispensing areas 13. Loading docks 14. Fire sprinkler test water 15. Drain or wash water from boiler drain lines, condensate drain lines, rooftop equipment, drainage sumps, and other sources 16. Unauthorized non-stormwater discharges 17. Building and grounds maintenance Design should prevent water from contacting work areas, prevent pollutants from encountering surfaces used by stormwater runoff, or where contact is unavoidable, treat stormwater to remove pollutants. Operations and maintenance activities required to achieve Source Control are to be included in the Operation and Maintenance Plan submitted for approvals and recorded with the property as required by ordinance. 5.3.3 Groundwater Well Protection Buffers: Groundwater well protection buffers must follow the standard of practice to meet the minimum horizontal separations and vertical sanitary seal requirements listed by the California Department of Water Resources, and the County of San Luis Obispo Department of Public Health. All new water wells shall be located an adequate horizontal distance from know or potential sources of pollution and contamination. Such sources include, but are not limited to: 1. Sanitary, industrial, and storm drainage systems; 2. Septic tanks and leach fields; 3. Recycled water irrigation systems; 4. Sewage and industrial waste ponds; 5. Barnyard and stable areas; 6. Feedlots; 7. Solid waste disposal sites; or 8. Above and below ground tanks and pipeline for storage and conveyance of chemicals. Where a groundwater well exist within the proposed development project, the well will need to be rehabilitated to meet the protection buffers, or may need to be destroyed per County Health Requirements and the California Department of Water Resources Standard Bulletins. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 55 6. Water Supply 6.1 Design Standards 6.1.1 Quantity of Water The quantity of water delivered to the distribution system from all sources must be sufficient to: 1. supply adequately 2. dependably 3. safely the total requirements of all customers, including fire hydrants, under maximum consumption. The distribution system must be capable of adequately delivering this water supply to all the customers. 6.1.2 Distribution System A. Operating Pressure Water distribution system mains must be designed to maintain normal operating pressures, excluding fire flows, of not less than 40 psig at the service connection and may not be more than 80-psig. Residual pressures throughput the entire distribution system under fire flow conditions shall comply with the fire protection standards. B. Size of Water Mains Minimum water main diameter size is 8-inches except: 1. A 6-inch main may be used in normal gridded street patterns where two 8-inch looped mains in adjacent streets are to be connected if the length is less than 350 feet and it will not have to support a fire hydrant. 2. Dead-end mains require special approval of both Fire Dept. and Utilities Dept. For dead-end mains, the minimum size must be: a. 4-inch main if less than 150 feet long and serving less than 10 dwelling units. b. 6-inch main if over 150 feet but less than 350 feet long and serving less than 25 dwelling units. c. 8-inch main if over 350 feet but less than 700 feet long and serving less than 50 R-1 dwelling units (with triple valve at intersection) d. 10-inch main if over 700 feet but less than 1500 feet long and serving less than 75 R-1 dwelling units (with triple valve at intersection and 250-foot maximum fire hydrant spacing). 3. Recycled water mains must be sized in accordance with the Recycled Water Master Plan, or as determined by the Utilities Department. 4. Recycled water mains design pressure may be reduced, if a lesser pressure class can be justified. Pressure varies in the recycled water system, and shall include a surge allowance per AWWA standards. Designers must contact the Utilities Department to obtain operating pressures, to properly design any extensions to the system. C. Alignment and Layout of Mains Water mains must be located per Engineering Standards 6010, 6110 and 6140. Minimum clearance between mains and street surface must be 3 feet. Minimum clearance between recycled water mains and street surface must be 5 feet. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 56 Clearance between waterlines and other fluid pipelines must comply with California Code of Regulations Title 22, Division 4, Chapter 16, Article 4, section 64572; Installations in existing developed areas must comply with current State guidance memorandums on separation. D. Valves The distribution system must be equipped with enough valves so that no single shutdown will result in shutting down a main, or necessitate the removal from service of a length of pipe greater than 500-feet. Valves must not be in gutters, spandrels or cross-gutters, and shall have 6” clearance between lip of gutter and the outside concrete collar when the valve is in asphalt pavement. Existing valves must be relocated as necessary. E. Hydrants Fire hydrants must be installed per the City Fire Code and to the satisfaction of the Fire Marshal and City Engineer. Fire hydrant location and service sizing must meet the requirements of the Fire Department Developer's Guide. On mains of 12 inches and larger, fire hydrant location and spacing must allow, whenever possible, for the placement of a fire hydrant instead of a blow-off assembly at low points and at the ends of water mains, as appropriate. F. Service Lines Water service must include all facilities necessary for the transmission of water from the nearest point of adequate supply to a meter vault at the front of each lot. For condominium projects, a separate meter vault must be provided for each condominium unit at the street frontage or as approved by the City Engineer. Pumping and storage equipment to provide sufficient volume and duration of flow of water must be provided. The design and location of the water system serving the proposed subdivision must be provided to the satisfaction of the City Engineer and Utilities Director. Water services may not be required to lots which will be in perpetual open space and will not require irrigation or fire suppression. All new services must be 1, 2 or 4 inches and larger. All new services 4 inches and larger shall comply with Engineering Standard 6250. Size of water services must be based on California Plumbing Code (CPC), and adequate for maximum density allowable on each specific lot. Meters must not be larger than service line and must be reasonably sized to maintain flow velocities within the manufacturer’s recommended operating range. In general, the operating range must result in a 95% to 100% meter reading accuracy during average and maximum day demands. New water services must be installed perpendicular to water main, and must have a minimum of 18” between service points. New irrigation services must connect to the recycled water system if the project site is within 500-ft from the existing recycled water main and within the masterplan service area. Financing of the mainline extension must be performed by the development and will be eligible for reimbursement agreements in accordance with the City Municipal Code. G. Thrust Blocks Concrete thrust blocks must be installed to properly restrain and protect pipeline, as shown in the Standard Drawings. Thrust blocks must be installed at all: Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 57 1. bends of 22 ½ degrees or more 2. end of plugged mains 3. behind each tee 4. each cross which is valved in such a manner that they can act as a tee 5. back of fire hydrants. The thrust block must extend from the fitting to undisturbed soil, and must be of such bearing area as to assure adequate resistance to the force to be encountered per the recommendations of a geotechnical engineer. Prior to pouring concrete, all fittings must be wrapped in minimum 8-mil polyethylene plastic sheet to protect bolts from being covered with concrete. In lieu of the above, movement may be prevented using restraining joints, where thrust blocks are not feasible due to limited space or other reasons, subject to the prior approval of the City. H. Valve Anchors Concrete valve anchors must be provided at all in-line valves. Prior to pouring concrete, all fittings must be wrapped in plastic to protect bolts from being covered with concrete. I. Air and Vacuum Release Valves Air and vacuum release valves must be installed in the water system at all points where it is indicated that air pockets may form. The design must be such as to ensure the release of air automatically from the water main, and mitigation of surge pressures when warranted. All valves must be designed for a minimum of 150 psi operating pressure. Air and Vacuum release stations must be located in order to provide the minimum lateral clearance from the travel way. J. Blowoffs A blowoff or fire hydrant must be installed in the water system at all dead-ends and low points. K. Sampling Stations Sampling stations may be required to be installed when directed by the City. 6.1.3 Cross Connections A. Backflow Prevention Required Backflow prevention devices must be installed on all service connections that pose a potential threat to health and safety of the community. At a minimum, the following service connections must require backflow prevention: 1. Landscape irrigation 2. Medical and health care facilities 3. Areas served by private wells 4. Restaurants and other food-preparation facilities 5. Private fire-protection lines, including fire sprinkler systems 6. Laboratories 7. Commercial and industrial facilities that use water for other than domestic purposes 8. Areas in a Manufacturing zone 9. Sites that are used or plumbed to use gray water systems. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 58 B. Location of Backflow Prevention Devices Backflow prevention devices must be located as close as practical to the point of connection. In addition, backflow devices must be located in accordance with Section 7603 of the California Code of Regulations. C. Ownership and Maintenance Potable Water Systems: The property owner where any service connection requiring a backflow prevention device is located, must be responsible for operation and maintenance of the device. The City is not responsible for operation and maintenance of these devices. Recycled Water Systems: The Applicant must develop, implement and provide the City an Operations and Maintenance Plan and Maintenance Agreements that clearly establish responsibility for all Recycled Water Irrigation Systems for projects subject to those performance requirements as listed in the Procedures for Recycled Water Use Manual. 7. Wastewater 7.1 Design Standards 7.1.1 Quantity of Flow Design flow criteria are summarized as follows (for newly constructed mains only – the Utilities Department will provide data for older mains): Domestic Sewage Generation Factors Average dry-weather flow (ADWF): Single Family Residential 150 gpd/EDU Multi-Family Residential 105 gpd/EDU Industrial / Manufacturing 54 gpd/k-sqft gross floor area Business Park 54 gpd/k-sqft gross floor area Commercial 60 gpd/k-sqft gross floor area Motel / Hotel 70 gpd/room Peak dry-weather flow (PDWF): ADWF x Peaking Factor Reductions in peak flows occur because of storage in the system and diversification of development. The following peaking factor must be used to obtain peak dry-weather flows: Residential Peaking Factor = 2.6*(Q^-0.10) Where Q is the cumulative average dry weather flow in the conveyance system calculated in million gallons per day (MGD). Example: PF=2.6*(5.4MGD^-0.10) equals a peaking factor of 2.19. Curves may be permitted if pipe deflection is limited to manufacturer's recommendations, with a minimum radius of 100 feet, and the curves are only in one plane (either horizontal or vertical) between adjacent manholes. Sewer mains and laterals must be located as shown in Engineering Standards 6010, 6110, 6140 and 6810. Clearance between waterlines and other fluid pipelines must comply with California Code of Regulations Title 22, Division 4, Chapter 16, Article 4, section 64572, Installations in existing developed areas must comply with current State guidance memorandums on separation. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 59 7.1.2 Manholes Manholes may not be spaced further than 400 feet apart. Upstream ends of sewer mains must terminate at manholes. Coatings will be required for drop manholes and other locations where gases are expected to accumulate. Drop manholes must be installed where invert transitions are greater than 30 inches. All inlets must be designed and installed such that the top of pipe elevations match. Where pipelines transition flows within the manhole more than 45 degrees, the flowline of the pipe flowing into the manhole must be a minimum of 0.10-foot above the flowline of the pipe flowing out from the manhole, or an amount necessary to match the top of pipe and hydraulic grade line, whichever is greater. All manholes must be constructed with precast bases as shown in Engineering Standards 6610 and 6620. Manholes must be 4 feet in diameter unless the size and/or number of inlet(s) and outlet(s) warrant the use of a 5-foot diameter manhole. Brick or block manholes will not be allowed. Cast-in-place manholes may be allowed under special circumstances where it is not feasible to construct pre-cast manholes. Concentric cones must be used. Eccentric cones may be used only in special cases, and only with approval of the City Utilities Department. Steps will not be allowed in manholes. Manholes must be watertight and pass vacuum test requirements. Manholes may not be located at the centerline of intersections. Where two or more lines enter a manhole, sufficient elevation difference must be provided in the trough elevations, whenever possible, to prevent the smaller of the lines from being surcharged by the larger line(s) under normal operating conditions. Top of smaller pipe must be no lower than top of larger pipe(s). 7.1.3 Pipe A. General Sewer main size must be determined by designing for flowing half-full, considering the flow generated by the development, the ultimate upstream development, and existing infiltration. New sewer systems shall be provided with pipe materials that eliminate infiltration, and reduce the potential for root intrusion. Minimum sewer main size is 8-inches diameter; except a 6-inch minimum size main may be allowed for the last run which ends in a manhole and cannot be later extended to serve other properties. Laterals must be sized to be adequate (4 inch minimum) for maximum allowable density on each specific lot. Pipe material must be fused HDPE unless otherwise required for special conditions such as bridge crossings. B. Laterals Sanitary sewer laterals must be stubbed to the front property line of each lot. All facilities for the transmission of sewage from each of the lots to the nearest adequate point of connection to the City’s sewer system must be installed as acceptable to the City Engineer. Sewer services are not required for lots which will be in perpetual open space use. The requirement for a sewer lateral may be waived upon a finding by the City that an alternative waste disposal system, which will provide a level of protection for public health and natural resources at least equivalent to public sewer, will be installed and maintained. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 60 Sewer laterals must have backwater valves installed whenever the flood level rim of the lowest fixture in the building (including basements) is less than adjacent upper or lower manhole, whichever controls, as determined by the City Engineer. See municipal code section 13.08.200. New developments planning to re-use an existing lateral shall provide CCTV inspection to confirm the integrity of the pipe preventing infiltration and root intrusion. CCTV requirements listed in the engineering specifications must be used in the video recording and reporting of the lateral condition. C. Slope and Alignment Sewer main slopes must be sufficient to provide a minimum velocity of 2 feet per second based on the peak dry- weather flow conveyed in the pipe. Grades must be designed from manhole outlets to inlets. Design velocities for sanitary sewers must not exceed 10 fps at peak flow, and must remain in a sub-critical flow. Minimum Slope for Sanitary Sewer Diameter Slope (%) 6 inch 0.50% 8 inch 0.35% 10 inch 0.25% 12 inch 0.20% 15 inch 0.15% 18 inch 0.12% Lateral 2.00% Sewer mains and laterals must be designed to be usable by each lot without the need for an ejector pump. Exceptions may be granted on a case-by-case basis by the City Engineer. Sewer main depth must accommodate all lateral connections and allow a 12-inch minimum vertical clearance between laterals and other utility conduits. Sewerage systems must be designed to have a minimum of curvature, both horizontal and vertical. Whenever possible, sewer lines must be laid out in a straight line between structures. Curved sewer lines will be allowed only under the following conditions: 1. All curve data must be shown on the plans. 2. Minimum radius of curvature must be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the City. 3. No deflections may be made at the pipe joints. D. Sewer Lines Within Easements All sewers must be located within a dedicated city street or alley or within a recorded easement. Sewer main and manholes not within a street of paved drive must be within an all-weather dust free access road at least 12 feet wide and must provide access to all manholes for maintenance with truck-mounted equipment. The access road grade must not exceed 20 percent, and a truck turn-around may be required. When required due to terrain or depth of sewer line the required easement width must be increased. All easements must include right of ingress and egress over adjoining property for maintenance, replacement and operation. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 61 8. Dry Utilities 8.1 Design Standards 8.1.1 General Provisions A. Improvements Required Subdivision improvements include: 1. Electrical 2. Telephone 3. Gas 4. cable television. Other public improvements, as defined in this document, must include utility improvements where required by conditions of approval or as determined necessary by the City. B. Plan Requirements The intent of these requirements is that sufficient utility detail be shown to permit the City, or other appropriate agency, to locate all utilities when maintenance to the roads and other utilities in the public right- of-way or easements becomes necessary. The plans must show the following utility information as a minimum: 1. Show all utilities in detail on the typical street sections. Include trench dimensions, depth, number of lines, and description of lines (line material, size, etc.) 2. Show complete utility layout. Include line location, road crossings, junction boxes, manholes, service connections or stubouts, etc. 3. The following note must be placed on utility improvement plans: “All wire and gas utility connections, distribution lines, and service locations shown on these plans are for information only and should not be considered final design. Utility purveyors may need to alter their design from what is depicted herein based upon future design modifications or during construction. This may result in additional redesign costs or charges to the owner for this work. No revisions to what is depicted herein may be constructed without the prior approval of the City. No above-ground facilities may be located where they block the accessible path of travel or intersection or driveway sight distance. Prior to final project acceptance it will be the owner’s responsibility to verify final utility alignments and ensure that adequate easements for such facilities are provided” C. Underground Installation Required All new and remodeled buildings must have service supplied by underground facilities in compliance with the City’s Municipal Code section 13.12. D. Service Extensions Required All utilities must be installed with service laterals to serve all new lots being created in any subdivision project. E. Acceptance by Utility Utility improvements will not be accepted as complete by the City, until written correspondence has been received from each utility providing service to the subdivision, indicating that their respective facilities are Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 62 completed to their satisfaction and “ready for service,” or that sufficient financial arrangements have been made to assure same. 9. Survey 9.1 Street Monuments Street monuments must be set to reference street centerlines at all intersections, angle points, beginning and ending of curves, radius point of cul-de-sacs, and at tract boundary as required by the City Engineer. Monuments may not be set further than 500 feet apart along centerlines, and must be shown on the parcel or final map. Monuments must be constructed and set per Engineering Standard 9020. Set permanent monuments at angle, curve points, and intersections of street centerlines. Any monument that is disturbed or destroyed must be replaced and corner record filed with County of San Luis Obispo. Set monuments in streets in compliance with Engineering Standard 9020. 9.2 Tract Boundary Monuments Tract boundary monuments must be set to reference tract boundary lines at all angle points, beginning and ending of curves, and intersections with street right-of-way lines. Provide survey monuments for all parcels contained within map. Tract boundary monuments must be set no further apart than 500 feet along boundary lines, and must be shown on the parcel or final map. Tract boundary monuments must be constructed of iron pipe, no smaller than 1.5 inches in diameter, no shorter than 30 inches in length, capped and stamped with either the land surveyor's or registered engineer's number, and indicated by a marker stake extending above the ground surface. 9.3 Lot Stakes Lot stakes must be set to reference lot lines at all angle points, and beginning and ending of curves, except where said point is to be set with a tract boundary monument. Lot stakes must be constructed of ¾ inch plugged galvanized pipe at least 18 inches in length, or a #5 rebar with plastic cap. If a lot corner falls on concrete or rock, the corner must be set with a lead plug. All corners must be tagged or marked with either the land surveyor's or registered engineer's number. All lot stakes must be set at ground surface, with white marker stakes located immediately adjacent. Offset staking or alternative staking will not be allowed without prior approval of the City Engineer. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 63 9.4 Vertical Control (Benchmarks) Points of known elevation must be set at approximately every 1000 to 1200 feet horizontally in new street systems, minimum of one point. Points are to be set in curbs or other concrete facilities near street corners or ends of cul-de-sacs, where they can be easily located by description. A nail and tag or copper disc, or brass cap labeled “Benchmark” with the surveyor’s license number, is to be set in the concrete. Provide record showing the location, elevation, and elevation basis to the City Engineer for inclusion in the City’s published Benchmarks. 10. Landscaping and Irrigation 10.1 General Landscaping and Irrigation must conform to the provisions in Section 17.87 of the City Municipal Code and Engineering Standards. The provisions of the Engineering Standards apply to the following landscape projects: 1. New residential, commercial, institutional and multi-family development projects with an aggregate landscape area equal to or greater than 500 square feet subject to a building permit or development review. 2. Rehabilitated landscapes for residential, institutional, commercial and multi-family development projects with a landscape area equal to or greater than 2,500 square feet which are otherwise subject to a building permit or development review. 10.2 Submittals 10.2.1 Development Review For projects that require development review (tentative parcel map, tentative tract, development plan or conditional use permit), project applicants must submit the following documentation: 1. A completed Maximum Applied Water Allowance (MAWA) for the conceptual landscape design. The MAWA estimate will be used as a maximum allowance for the project’s building permit application. 2. A conceptual landscape design plan which demonstrates that the landscape will meet the landscape design specifications of the City Engineering Standards Uniform Design Criteria for Landscaping and Irrigation. 3. A conceptual irrigation design plan which notes the irrigation methods and design actions that will be employed to meet the irrigation specifications of the City Engineering Standards Uniform Design Criteria for Landscaping and Irrigation. 4. A grading plan which demonstrates the landscape will meet the specifications of the City Engineering Standards Uniform Design Criteria for Landscaping and Irrigation. 10.2.2 Building Application Prior to the issuance of a building permit, project applicants must submit the following: 1. A completed Maximum Applied Water Allowance (MAWA) form based on the final landscape design plan. MAWA calculator is available at: www.slocity.org/government/department-directory/utilities-department/documents-and-files 2. A final landscape design plan that includes all the criteria required in the City Engineering Standards Uniform Design Criteria for Landscaping and Irrigation. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 64 3. A final irrigation plan that includes all the criteria required in the City Engineering Standards Uniform Design Criteria for Landscaping and Irrigation. 4. A soils management report that includes at a minimum the criteria required in the City Engineering Standards Uniform Design Criteria for Landscaping and Irrigation. 5. A final grading plan that includes all the criteria required in the City Engineering Standards Uniform Design Criteria for Landscaping and Irrigation. 6. A hydrozone table with a summary of Estimated Total Water Use (ETWU) and the corresponding irrigation window. ETWU calculator is available at: www.slocity.org/government/department-directory/utilities-department/documents-and-files 7. Plans must comply with City Engineering Drafting Guidelines included in appendix. 10.2.3 Project Completion Upon completion of the installation of the landscape and irrigation system and prior to the issuance of the Certificate of Occupancy, the project applicant must submit the following: 1. A Certification of Completion signed by the professional of record for the landscape and irrigation design certifying that the project was installed per the City approved landscape design, irrigation and grading plans and meets or exceeds an average landscape irrigation efficiency of 0.75. The City reserves the right to inspect and audit any irrigation system which has received an approval through the provisions of this chapter. www.slocity.org/government/department-directory/utilities-department/documents-and-files 2. A project applicant must develop and provide to the owner or owner representative and the City an irrigation schedule that assists in the water management of the project and utilizes the minimum amount of water required to maintain plant health. Irrigation schedules must meet the criteria in the City Engineering Standards Uniform Design Criteria for Landscaping and Irrigation. 3. A regular maintenance schedule must be submitted by the project applicant with the Certificate of Completion that includes: routine inspections, adjustment and repairs to the irrigation system, aerating and dethatching turf areas, replenishing mulch, fertilizing, pruning and weeding. The maintenance schedule will be provided to the owner or owner representative. 10.3 Landscaping Design 10.3.1 Water Use For the efficient use of water, a landscape must be designed and planned for the intended function of the project. For each landscape project, applicants must submit a landscape design plan in accordance with the following: 1. Any combination of plant materials that do not exceed the Maximum Applied Water Allowance (MAWA). The method to calculate the Maximum Applied Water Allowance and Estimated Total Water Use (ETWU) must be in accordance with the MAWA calculator. www.slocity.org/government/department-directory/utilities-department/documents-and-files 2. Plant factors used to calculate the MAWA must be derived from the most recent edition of the Department of Water Resources “Water Use Classification of Landscape Species (WUCOLS)”. 3. Each hydrozone must have plant materials with similar water requirements and be identified as low, moderate or high water use on the plans. 4. Plants must be selected and planted appropriately based upon their adaptability to the climatic, soil, and topographical conditions of the project site, and water attributes. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 65 5. Turf is not allowed on slopes greater than 25% (1-foot rise for every 4 feet of horizontal distance) where the toe of the slope is adjacent to an impermeable hardscape. 6. Turf must not be used in areas less than 8 feet by 8 feet in size, irregularly shaped areas, street medians, traffic islands, planter strips, bulbouts of any size or raised beds for maximum water efficiency and ease of maintenance. 7. Low and moderate water-use plants can be mixed, but the entire hydrozone will be classified as moderate water use for MAWA calculations. 8. High water-use plants must not be mixed in the same hydrozone with low or moderate water-use plants. 9. New trees must be clear from sewer and water services per engineering specifications. 10. Invasive plants as listed by the Cal-IPC are prohibited. 11. High use plants, characterized by a plant factor of 0.7 to 1.0, are prohibited in street medians. 12. Recirculating water systems must be used for water features. 13. The surface area of water features, including swimming pools, will be included in a high water-use hydrozone. 14. A landscape design plan for projects in fire-prone areas must address fire safety and prevention. A defensible space or zone around a building or structure is required per Public Resources Code Section 4219 (a) and (b). Avoid fire-prone plant materials and highly flammable mulches. 10.3.2 Irrigation Plan The irrigation system and its related components must be planned and designed to allow for proper installation, management, and maintenance. Project applicants must submit an irrigation design plan that is designed and installed to meet irrigation efficiency criteria: 1. Landscape water meters must be installed for all non-residential irrigated landscapes of 1,000 square feet or more. 2. Soil types and infiltration rates must be considered when designing irrigation systems. All irrigation systems must be designed to avoid runoff, low-head drainage, overspray, or other similar conditions where water flows onto adjacent property, non-irrigated areas, walks, roadways, or structures. 3. Proper irrigation equipment and schedules, including features such as repeat cycles, must be used to closely match application rates to infiltration rates, to minimize or eliminate runoff. 4. Overhead irrigation spray (using manufacturer specified throw distances) is not be permitted within 24 inches of any non-pervious surface, to prevent runoff and overspray. Allowable irrigation within the setback from non-pervious surfaces may include drip, drip line, or other low flow or non-spray technology. These restrictions may be modified if the adjacent non-pervious surfaces are designed and constructed to drain entirely to landscaping. 5. Irrigation systems must be designed, maintained, and managed using such techniques as low- precipitation heads, drip irrigation, moisture sensors, check valves, matched precipitation rates of sprinkler heads and other emission devices, and other water-conserving techniques where appropriate. 6. Each valve must irrigate a hydrozone with similar site, slope, sun exposure, soil conditions, and plant materials with similar water use. A single valve must not irrigate hydrozones that mix high water-use plants with moderate or low water-use plants. 7. Irrigation systems must be designed, maintained, and managed to meet or exceed an average landscape irrigation efficiency of 0.75 where irrigation efficiency means the measurement of the amount of water beneficially used divided by the amount of water applied. Irrigation efficiency is Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 66 derived from measurements and estimates of irrigation system characteristics and management practices. 8. Rain sensors, either integral or auxiliary, that suspend or alter irrigation operation during rainy weather conditions is required on all irrigation systems. 9. Head-to-head coverage is required unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer’s specifications. 10. Low volume irrigation is required where plant height at maturity will affect the uniformity of an overhead system. 11. The irrigation system must be designed to ensure that the dynamic pressure at each emission device is within the manufacturer’s recommended pressure range for optimal performance. 12. Manual shut-off valves (such as a gate valve, ball valve, or butterfly valve) is required, as close as possible to the point of connection of the water supply, to minimize water loss in case of an emergency (such as a main line break) or routine repair. 13. Automatic irrigation controllers utilizing either evapotranspiration or soil moisture sensor data is required for irrigation scheduling in irrigation systems for applicable projects in section 17.87.020 (A) (1) of the Municipal Code. 14. If the project is within the Recycled Water Master Plan area, the irrigation system must be designed and operated consistent with recycled water standards described in the City’s Procedures for Recycled Water Use, including the requirement that sites utilizing recycled water include backflow protection on all potable service connections. 15. For City facilities, if the project is within the Recycled Water Master Plan area, drip irrigation and small pop-up sprayers may not be used in the irrigation system unless authorized by the Parks Maintenance Supervisor. 16. For City facilities, pull box spacing must not exceed 200’, and conduit fill must not exceed 26%. 17. For City facilities, irrigation boxes must be placed in landscaped areas whenever possible. If irrigation boxes are set in hardscape areas, they must be concrete boxes. The boxes must be traffic rated if the area is open to public traffic or used by maintenance vehicles. Irrigation boxes in playing fields must be buried 4 inches below grade. 18. All irrigation emission devices must meet the requirements set in the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards, American society of Agricultural and biological Engineers/International code Council’s (ASABE/ICC) 802-2014 “Landscape Irrigation Sprinkler and Emitter Standard. All sprinkler heads installed in the landscape must document a distribution uniformity low quarter of 0.65 or high using the protocol defined in ASABE/ICC 802-2014. 10.3.3 Soils Management Report To reduce runoff and encourage healthy plant growth, soil amendment, mulching and soil conditioning recommendations must be prepared by a licensed landscape architect, licensed landscape contractor, licensed civil engineer or licensed architect. Prior to planting of any materials, compacted soils must be transformed to a friable condition. 1. If the characteristics of the project’s soil are known, the minimum requirements of the report must include the following: 2. A minimum of 6 inches of non-mechanically compacted soil must be available for water absorption and root growth in the planted areas. 3. For landscape installations, compost at a rate of minimum of cubic yards per 1,000 square feet of permeable area must be incorporated to the depth of six inches into the soil. Soils with greater than 6% organic matter in the top six inches of soil are exempt from this requirement. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 67 4. A minimum of 3 inches of mulch must be applied on all exposed soil surfaces of planting areas except in turf areas, creeping or rooting groundcovers or direct seeding applications. Plant mulch must be shredded redwood bark unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. 5. If the characteristics of the project’s soil are unknown, the project applicant must submit soil samples to a laboratory for analysis and recommendations. 6. Soil sampling must be conducted in accordance with laboratory protocol, including protocols regarding adequate sampling depth for the intended plants. 7. The soil analysis may include: soil texture; infiltration rate determined by laboratory test or soil texture infiltration rate table; pH; total soluble salts; sodium; percent organic matter; and recommendations. 8. The soil analysis report must be made available, in a timely manner, to the professionals preparing the landscape design plans and irrigation design plans to make any necessary adjustments to the design plans. 9. The project applicant must submit documentation verifying implementation of soil analysis report recommendations to the City with Certificate of Completion. 10.3.4 Grading Plan For the efficient use of water, grading of a project site must be designed to minimize soil erosion, runoff, and water waste. 1. The project applicant must submit a landscape grading plan that indicates finished configurations and elevations of the landscape area including: 2. Height of graded slopes; 3. Drainage patterns; 4. Pad elevations; 5. Finish grade; and 6. Stormwater retention improvements, if applicable. 7. To prevent excessive erosion and runoff, grading must comply with the following to the maximum extent practicable: 8. Grade so that all irrigation and normal rainfall remains within property lines and does not drain onto non-permeable hardscapes; 9. Avoid disruption of natural drainage patterns and undisturbed soil; 10. Avoid soil compaction in landscape areas; and 11. Preserve natural drainage channels. 10.4 Miscellaneous City Facility Provisions: 10.4.1 Irrigation System Operational Requirements Design must ensure areas of turf are not under watered, relative to the rest of the turf, resulting in brown patches. The designer may review the irrigation installation and make recommendations for corrective action on the part of the installer; however, if the system cannot, despite proper installation and adjustment of the irrigation, be operated to provide proper coverage, the designer must redesign and direct revised installation at his/her cost until the system can be shown to operate properly via an audit and empirical data. 10.4.2 Hardscape Walkways and pads for appurtenances in parks must be concrete or pervious concrete built in accordance with City Standards for sidewalk construction and graded to prevent water from ponding on the walkway or pad. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 68 Unless variances are justified and approved by the City Engineer, walkways must meet current ADA accessibility requirements. Pads in sod areas, such as picnic table pads, must be round, oval or have rounded edges to allow mowing without damage to mow blades and pads. 10.4.3 Median islands Median island noses must have a 5-foot section of standard sidewalk concrete at intersections as a pedestrian refuge. Island noses should not extend into intersection crosswalk areas. Island areas 4 feet or less must be hardscaped. All hardscaped surfaces within median islands, except for pedestrian areas, must be decorative. Median island irrigation systems must be sized to planned street island build-out (multi-island plans), including mainline sizing, water and control connections, and control systems configuration and capacity. Median islands, including traffic circles, and center cul-de-sac landscaping may be used for infiltration of stormwater where suited to the site conditions. Design must be such as to prevent damage to adjacent roadway sections from infiltration, to the satisfaction of the City Engineer. 10.4.4 Playgrounds and Miscellaneous areas An engineered wood surfacing, meeting accessibility requirements, must be used under play equipment. Alternative surfaces must be submitted to the City Engineer for review and approval. Benches and picnic tables must be of a low maintenance material such as rubber coated steel. No wood is allowed. Alternative materials must be submitted to the City Engineer for review and approval. 10.4.5 System Pressure Where an existing meter or irrigation system is present, the designer must obtain the current line pressure to use in design. Where no existing system exists, the City of San Luis Obispo Utilities Department must be contacted to determine approximate existing system pressures. For systems that will be temporarily connected to the potable water system and eventually connected to the recycled water system, or for areas that may be set up to use both systems, the designer must consider the pressure in both systems and design the irrigation system so that it will work with either pressure. The designer must contact the responsible maintenance division for the landscaped area (City of San Luis Obispo Public Works for City projects or areas to be dedicated) to determine the watering window to be used for the area. The designer must use that window in determining the number of valves turned on at any given time and the resulting load on the system. Calculations of system capacities and any assumptions made about the system must be submitted for review and approval. Calculations submitted must clearly show an accounting for system losses and concurrent loading to prevent under-sizing of the system. Where systems do not operate as needed to provide even distribution of water, including problems resulting from an undersized service, the designer will be responsible to provide any needed redesign and to pay for necessary field corrections. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 69 The irrigation design must include a pressure reducer or booster pump to be installed, if needed, based on the actual pressure in the new irrigation system. System must be designed for maximum efficiency. 10.4.6 Controller Irrigation designers must contact the Parks Maintenance Supervisor to determine what, if any, telemetry control equipment will be required. Systems are to be designed to current City Standards for Controller equipment where an irrigated area is City owned or to be dedicated. If control is to be via phone line, the designer must coordinate with the City’s telephone system representative or City project manager to arrange for hook up. 11. Subdivision Design Criteria and Improvement Standards 11.1 General requirement The design criteria for subdivisions and required physical improvements must be in compliance with the City’s grading ordinance, zoning regulations, subdivision standards, City Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards and other applicable regulations. 11.2 Improvements Improvement work, including grading, must not commence until plans for all such work have been approved and permitted by the City, including required stormwater related plans and submittals. Improvements to be installed by the subdivider, in accordance with these standards, include the following: 1. The full width of each street must be improved by grading, base preparation, and paving. If a street constitutes a boundary of the subdivision or connects the subdivision with the rest of the City’s street system, even though it is not within the area to be subdivided, the full width of the roadway must be improved. The City may, depending on individual circumstances, require full right-of-way improvements, including curb, gutter, and sidewalk, on the side opposite the subdivision. 2. Streets must include any required curb, gutter, sidewalk, driveway ramps, curb ramps and associated landscaping (street trees, parkway, and medians) along both sides. Alternative pedestrian walkways and bikeways must be concrete or other accessible surface material approved by the City. 3. The subdivider must complete any railroad crossing necessary for the subdivision, including application to the California Public Utilities Commission. 4. Separate paths or bicycle / pedestrian areas may be required. 5. Bus stops and benches must be provided where the subdivision abuts existing or planned City bus routes and a stop is required for the use of the neighborhood. 6. Durable boundary monuments must be installed and shown on the final map. 7. Street trees must be provided as required by the tree regulations, as set forth in Chapter 12.24 of the City’s Municipal Code. 8. Street name signs, traffic control, and warning signs must be installed. Traffic signals and traffic signal control conduits may be required by the City Engineer. 9. Utilities to be installed by the subdivider must include those listed in this standard. The development of these facilities may require financial contribution for previous improvements to the systems, as provided in Chapter 13.04 of the City’s Municipal Code, in the most recent council resolution on utility connection charges, or in any agreement affecting a particular portion of a system. All new utility distribution facilities must be placed underground, except accessory facilities such as terminal boxes, meter cabinets, and transformers may be installed aboveground. The subdivider must make all necessary arrangements with the utility companies for the following facilities: Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 70 a. A water system for domestic service and fire protection provided to each lot of the proposed subdivision or, for condominium projects, to each condominium unit b. Where identified as a recycled water service area in the Recycled Water Master Plan, recycled water lines installed to serve those areas c. A sewer system for domestic use provided to each lot of the proposed subdivision d. Stormwater management and drainage, water quality, erosion and flood control facilities e. Street lights and signals f. Electric power, gas, cable, and telephone services stubbed to each lot or, for condominium projects, to each condominium unit; and all facilities to distribute such services provided per the requirements of the responsible utility companies 10. All new utility distribution facilities must be placed underground, except accessory facilities such as terminal boxes, meter cabinets, and transformers may be installed aboveground. The subdivider must make all necessary arrangements with the utility companies for these facilities. 11. The subdivider must carry out protective measures as required by the City to assure the proper functioning and maintenance of other required improvements and properties adjacent to the subdivision. Temporary protective improvements may be required prior to or concurrent with the construction of permanent improvements. 11.3 Lot Design 11.3.1 Multiple frontages Single-family residential lots with frontage on more than one street are discouraged, except for corner lots or where topography makes a single frontage impractical. The City may require the release of access rights on one frontage which must be noted on the parcel or final map. 11.3.2 Lot lines Lot lines should be at the top of slope banks. Side lot lines should be perpendicular to the street on straight streets, or radial to the street on curved streets, unless another angle would provide better building orientation as documented in the submittal. On corner lots, the lot lines adjacent to streets must be rounded with a radius adequate to provide for street improvements. 11.3.3 Flag lots (deep lot subdivision) Flag lots may be approved for subdividing deep lots where development would not be feasible with the installation of a standard street, either alone or in conjunction with neighboring properties, or where justified by topographical conditions. Such subdivision must conform to Subdivision Regulations, Section 16.18.060 of the Municipal Code. 12. Construction of Private Development Projects The section generally describes the requirements and responsibilities for all construction and maintenance projects that occur within the right-of-way. However, the following format and procedure are unique to improvements associated with private development projects within the right-of-way. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 71 12.1 Before Construction 12.1.1 Pre-Construction Conference A Pre-Construction Conference is required prior to commencing the work shown on the approved improvement plans. The Engineer of Work must arrange this, and notify the City. The conference agenda will typically review the following items, as appropriate: 1. Contact information 2. Construction Schedule 3. Potential Utility conflicts 4. Typical and Special Inspection requirements 5. Unique project safety requirements including: a. trench safety b. confined space safety c. Work Zone Safety 6. Traffic Control and accessibility 7. Environmental site constraints 8. Regulatory permit requirements 9. Storm water control and requirements 10. Accommodation and coordination with project neighbors 11. Any unique projects constraints The conference must include the following attendees, as appropriate: 1. The Developer 2. The Engineer of Work 3. The Contractor 4. The Soils Engineer 5. Representatives of the affected utility providers 6. Representatives of the permitting agencies 7. Representatives of City 8. At least five working day advanced notice of the time and location of the conference must be provided to the City. 12.1.2 Contractor’s Requirements Contractors and subcontractors performing the work under these Standards must possess a valid State license to perform such work. The Contractor or his/her duly authorized representative must be available on the job site during the time when any work is in progress. A. Trench Safety All work must be performed in accordance with the requirements of the State of California Department of Industrial Relations. The Contractor must conform to the permit requirements of the Division of Industrial Safety and must obtain any necessary trenching permit directly from the Department of Industrial Relations. The Contractor’s attention is directed to the provisions of Section 6705 of the Labor Code concerning trench excavation safety plans. Excavation for any trench 5-feet or more in depth must not begin until the Contractor has obtained a trenching permit from the California Department of Industrial Relations. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 72 B. Agency Permits All needed regulatory permits must be obtained by the developer prior to starting any work covered by or impacted by those permit(s). The developer must keep these permits current. Copies of the permit documentation must be kept on site for review by the City. Issuance of an encroachment permit or other permits by the City does not relieve the developer from obtaining these permits. C. Encroachment Permit After approval of the improvement plans and prior to starting any work within the City right-of-way, the Developer must obtain an encroachment permit from the City. Copies of the encroachment permit must be kept on site for review by the City or other agency representatives. 12.2 During Construction 12.2.1 Inspection by Engineer of Work The Engineer of Work has is responsibility for inspection during the construction of all improvements that are regulated by these Standards. The Engineer of Work, at a minimum, must inspect the following milestones during construction, and provide a written inspection report to the City: 1. Concrete form work 2. Hot Mix Asphalt paving operations 3. Initiating the placement of the roadway base course 4. Substantial completion of roadway base placement and compaction 5. Substantial completion of roadway subgrade excavation/fill placement 6. Trench bedding and compaction Other required inspections may be determined necessary by the City. 12.2.2 Workplace and Worksite Conduct 1. It is expected that developers and their contractors will promote a businesslike workplace (including work sites) that assures courteous treatment for workers, fellow contractors, City employees, and the public. Harassment or discrimination based on race, religion, national origin, marital status, disability, age, sex or sexual orientation is not to be tolerated. 2. It is expected that the developer and contractors will promote good relations with the neighbors and public affected by a project. This typically requires regulating construction activity to minimize impacts to the neighborhood caused by noise, dust, construction debris, and traffic disruption. When access or traffic will be delayed, advanced notification must be provided to the affected neighbors as well as to local emergency responders. 3. It is incumbent on the contractor to control the work site and provide a safe working environment. Contractor must require employees to wear appropriate personal protective equipment while on the work site. 4. It is incumbent on the contractor to control the work site and ensure all erosion control measures, traffic control devices are in place and properly maintained. The work site must also be kept in clean and orderly. 12.2.3 Clean Up During the progress of the work, the Contractor must keep the entire job site in a clean and orderly condition. Excess or unsuitable backfill material, broken pipe, or other waste material must be removed from the job site. Rewritten MAY 2018 UNIFORM DESIGN CRITERIA 1010 MH MH 6-17 Page 73 Spillage resulting from hauling operations along or across existing streets or roads must be removed immediately by the Contractor. All gutters and roadside ditches must be kept clean and free from obstructions. Any deviation from this practice must have prior approval from the City. 12.3 Project Completion Once the work on the project site is complete, including: 1. site cleanup, 2. dressing and hydroseeding graded slopes, 3. completion of all utility and drainage facilities 4. removal of temporary traffic control devices from public roads the Project Engineer may initiate the final processing of the improvements. 12.3.1 Clean Up Before final acceptance of the work, the Contractor must: 1. carefully clean up the work and premises 2. remove all temporary structures built 3. remove all surplus construction materials and rubbish of all kinds 4. leave the site in a neat condition. 12.3.2 Record Drawings During the progress of the work, the Engineer of Work must maintain one set of prints of the improvement plans showing all as-built changes. Each as-built change must be approved by the City before being made. This set must be available on the job for inspection by the City at any time. Upon completion of the work, the Engineer of Work must make as-built changes on the original plans, and return them to the City prior to acceptance of the project. 12.3.3 Improvements to be Accepted for City Maintenance For any public improvement which is to be accepted for City maintenance, the Engineer of Work must submit records of the improvements to be accepted, in AutoCAD and PDF format of all construction drawings. Revise General Notes New border May 2018 UPWARD & DOWNWARD DRIVEWAYS MAXIMUM RISE & DESCENT (RESIDENTIAL) 2140 DVB BL 11-06 BL MH 1-14 MAXIMUM RISE & DESCENT PERMITTED ON STANDARD DRIVEWAYS UPWARD DRIVEWAY MAXIMUM RISE DOWNWARD DRIVEWAY MAXIMUM DESCENT Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Run Rise Run Rise Run Descent Run Descent 10' 1.0' 39' 6.8' 6' 0.4' 35' 5.4' 11' 1.2' 40' 7.0' 7' 0.5' 36' 5.6' 12' 1.4' 41' 7.2' 8' 0.6' 37' 5.8' 13' 1.6' 42' 7.4' 9' 0.7' 38' 6.0' 14' 1.8' 43' 7.6' 10' 0.8' 39' 6.2' 15' 2.0' 44' 7.8' 11' 0.9' 40' 6.4' 16' 2.2' 45' 8.0' 12' 1.0' 41' 6.6' 17' 2.4' 46' 8.2' 13' 1.2' 42' 6.8' 18' 2.6' 47' 8.4' 14' 1.3' 43' 7.0' 19' 2.8' 48' 8.6' 15' 1.4' 44' 7.2' 20' 3.0' 49' 8.8' 16' 1.6' 45' 7.4' 21' 3.2' 50' 9.0' 17' 1.8' 46' 7.6' 22' 3.4' 51' 9.2' 18' 2.0' 47' 7.8' 23' 3.6' 52' 9.4' 19' 2.2' 48' 8.0' 24' 3.8' 53' 9.6' 20' 2.4' 49' 8.2' 25' 4.0' 54' 9.8' 21' 2.6' 50' 8.4' 26' 4.2' 55' 10.0' 22' 2.8' 51' 8.6' 27' 4.4' 56' 10.2' 23' 3.0' 52' 8.8' 28' 4.6' 57' 10.4' 24' 3.2' 53' 9.0' 29' 4.8' 58' 10.6' 25' 3.4' 54' 9.2' 30' 5.0' 59' 10.8' 26' 3.6' 55' 9.4' 31' 5.2' 60' 11.0' 27' 3.8' 56' 9.6' 32' 5.4' 61' 11.2' 28' 4.0' 57' 9.8' 33' 5.6' 62' 11.4' 29' 4.2' 58' 10.0' 34' 5.8' 63' 11.6' 30' 4.4' 59' 10.2' 35' 6.0' 64' 11.8' 31' 4.6' 60' 10.4' 36' 6.2' 65' 12.0' 32' 4.8' 65' 11.4' 37' 6.4' 70' 13.0' 33' 5.0' 70' 12.4' 38' 6.6' 80' 15.0' 34' 5.2' 80' 14.4' GENERAL NOTES: A. All values shown in feet unless otherwise noted. B. Maximum rise and descent and run shall be measured for the WORST condition between the back of the sidewalk extension and the finished floor grade at the garage entrance. 4"5' - 3 38" (VERIFY 16 PAVERS PER ROW PRIOR TO POURING FORMS) SIDEWALK RAILROAD DISTRICT 4150 New (Replaces former Boardwalk)JDL DA 3-17 Brick to Concrete Paver KH MH 3-18 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: SECTION A-A PLAN SECTION B-B A A 4" B 1 5 4" R = 14" SIDEWALK AND BASE PER ENG. STD. 4110 1 6 SEE ENG. STD. 4030 1 2 3 4 5 4 1 1"2 21 3 3GENERAL NOTES: A.For use in Railroad District only. B.See Engineering Standard 8135 for Tree Well in Railroad District. INSTALLATION NOTES: DRAINAGE: Trowel a 34" wide x 1" deep weep slot at 10' O.C. sloping toward the drain outlet. Install a 34" diameter PVC drain pipe through curb face, aligned to bottom of troweled weep slots. Cover paver side of pipe with plastic window screen mesh and attach with zip tie. Cover mesh with tape during installation and remove tape after forms are removed. Pipe shall be cut flush with concrete. BEDDING SAND: 1" min. (2" at weep slots) concrete bedding sand in compliance with ASTM C33 specifications. PAVERS: Air Vol Block Holland Pavers, "Railroad Blend" tumbled concrete pavers or approved equal. Pavers shall be Type 1 and meet ASTM C936 specifications. Red brick is not an approved equal. PATTERN: Pavers shall be installed in a standard "Running Bond" pattern. Cut pavers shall be no less than 2" long or wide. Surface of paver shall be set flush with curbs. COMPACTION: After pavers have been laid, sweep surface clean of any debris. ASTM C33 sand shall be swept into joints. Tamp the pavers into bedding sand with a plate compactor and vibrate sand up into joints. Adjust speed of compactor to run with high vibration, low amplitude, to avoid a jumping motion. Start at one edge of the sidewalk and compact the perimeter. Compact remaining area in 4" - 6" overlapping passes. Repeat process, compacting in opposite direction. Tamp pavers with at least two passes of the compactor at 90° angles to each other. Inspect and replace any broken pavers. PAVEMENT REMOVAL & REPAIR: See Engineering Standard 4110. INSTALLATION: Pavers shall be installed with the non-beveled side facing up. 6 1.5% SLOPE (1% MIN., 2% MAX.) 6" 7 7 May 2018 CONCRETE PAVER GENERAL NOTES: Curb ramps shall be constructed per Engineering Standard 4440 in conjunction with current California Department of Transportation Standard Plans RSP A88A and RSP A88B with the following exceptions (a copy of the standard current at the time of this printing is included in the appendices): 1.Dimension “T” for the thickness of the concrete shall be 4” in the curb ramp area and 6” in the curb and gutter area in accordance with Engineering Standards 4030 and 4110. Concrete shall be Class 3. 2.Curb ramps shall include 4” of Class 3 aggregate base under the sidewalk area of the curb ramp and 6” of Class 3 aggregate base under the curb and gutter area of the curb ramp. 3.Curb ramp shall be reinforced (#3 @ 18” O.C. or #4 @ 24” O.C.) both ways the full width and depth of the curb ramp. For corner curb ramps reinforcement shall be installed throughout the curb ramp beginning at the BCR and end at the ECR. For mid-block curb ramps reinforcement shall be installed throughout ramp and flare. 4.½” X 18” smooth bar dowels shall be provided at expansion joints at 24” O.C. 5.Curb ramp gutter dimensions to match adjacent gutters. 6.See Engineering Standard 4110 for notes regarding pavement removal and repair. TRUNCATED DOMES: Truncated domes / Tactile Detectable Warning System shall conform to the following: 1.Truncated domes / Tactile Detectable Warning Systems shall be SafetyStep TD Traditional or approved equal and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.The finished surface of the detectable warning mat shall be free from blemishes. 3.Dome pattern shall be aligned with the path of travel. 4.When installing Detectable Warning Material on an existing curb ramp all cracks with elevation differences shall be ground smooth. Cracks with width or depth greater than 14" shall be patched with a non-shrink grout to a surface even with existing sidewalk prior to installation. Any elevation differences shall be ground smooth prior to installing domes. 5.Detectable warning material at all curb ramp locations shall be installed to a depth of 3' and to a width equal to that of the ramp width. ADDITIONAL NOTES FOR MISSION STYLE AREA: 1.Additional notes for Mission Style Sidewalk Areas shall apply to those areas designated as Mission Style Sidewalk Areas per City Council Resolution (Mission Style Sidewalk District Map included in the appendices). 2.Ramp and adjoining sidewalks shall be constructed in accordance with Engineering Standard 4220 for color, finish and tile placement. System Type:Flexible mat with wear-resistant coating. Material:Polymer-modified concrete with fiberglass reinforcement. Coating:Field-applied system consisting of pigmented acrylic sealer and clear acrylic sealer. Installation:Bonded to concrete substrate on 100% of area by flexible acrylic resins. Fitting:Mats can be abutted with visually seamless result. Field Cutting:Can be trimmed to size and shape with razor-knife. Water Absorption:ASTM D570 Water Absorptions of Plastics: 6.5% Water Vapor Transmission:ASTM E69 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials: PERM = 0.958 Non-Slip Surface:Bonded application of #30 or #20 silver silica sand of entire field and domes. Slip Resistance:In addition to dome, system incorporates medium (#20 mesh) or fine (#30 mesh) graded silver silica sand into top coating. Compressive Strength:ASTM C109 compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars: 5690 PSI Tensile Strength:ASTM C190-85 Tensile Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars: 855 PSI ADA Compliance:Conformance with Department of General Services, Division of State Architect. Flexural Strength:1835 PSI Warranty:5 years Color:Yellow conforming to Federal Standard 595B, color No. 33538. CURB RAMP CORNERS & MID-BLOCK 4440 Revised Notes 12 and 14 MH BL 10-09 Revise notes 4, 6 KH MH 11-17 Truncated Domes JDL BL 06-12 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 CutCutGutter Street Sidewalk SIDEWALK SECTION PLAN OF CURB, GUTTER & SIDEWALK Curb Face 6" 12" x 18" smooth bars @ 24" O.C. in sidewalk, one each in curb and gutter, one end to be sleeved or greased. Area to be removed and replaced Area to be removed and replaced NOTE: Remove complete sections of curb, gutter and sidewalk in compliance with section 73-1.03 of the standard specifications. See Engineering Standard 4110 for notes regarding required pavement removal and repair. T REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: CUTTING CONCRETE 4910 Revised General Note MH BL 2-14 Removal Cut Detail; Revised NoteSR BL 1-14 Drafting edits JDL MH 11-12 May 2018 30' 36'FEEDER LINE, ONE BUS - 60' TRUNK LINE, TWO BUSES - 100'30' L L1 L2 A B C D E 36 4.25 4.00 8.50 8.20 0.30 7.30 1.20 2.855.650.707.808.505.876.3330 REVERSE TAPER - GEOMETRICS Bus Pad Roadway Sidewalk Bus Pad FEEDER LINE, ONE BUS and TRUNK LINE, TWO BUSES TANGENTTANGENTR=27' R=27' MONOLITHIC POUR NOTES: 1.Reinforce 10' wide bus pad and sidewalk within turnout. 8" Class 2 concrete with #4 @ 24" o.c. both ways reinforcing over 6" Class 2 Aggregate Base. 2.Curb height 8" maximum 3.See Engineering Standards 4030 and 4110 for Curb, Gutter and Sidewalk. 4.See Engineering Standard 4910 for sawcutting existing PCC. 5.See Engineering Standard 7210 for Sign Post. 6.Score at 10' intervals. SECTION 2% max. Street CONCRETE BUS TURNOUT 4920 Drafting edits JDL MH 12-12 Add boarding/alighting area JDL DA 10-15 Revise rebar specs JDL WAP 11-98 C B D E E D B C A TRUNK LINE, TWO BUSES (Intersecting Road or Driveway as entrance) L L1 L2 L2 L1 FLOWLINE AND EDGE SHALL MATCH ADJACENT GUTTER FLOWLINES AND LIPS.1% to 2% 10' BUS PAD SIGN POST and BUS STOP SIGN CONTINUOUS STEEL (TYP.) SIGN POST and BUS STOP SIGN EXPANSION JOINTS BUS TURNOUT DIMENSIONS FOR BUSES 8'6" WIDE AND THIRTY-SIX (36') TO FORTY (40') LONG Roadway Sidewalk REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: 8' min. CLEAR BOARDING/ALIGHTING AREA, 2% MAXIMUM SLOPE EITHER DIRECTION. 100' 5' min.2% max.May 2018 FRONT ELEVATION INSTALLATION NOTES: "AT-STOP" schedule holder. Model RCH-14, color RAL 5010 or approved equal. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. 12" x 18" Side-bracket mounted Route Sign with Route Block silk-screened route sticker. These are available from the City at pre-purchased cost. See Engineering Standard 7210 for Metal Sign Post. 13' Dome-roof shelter, Tolar Model #13NALD-PM-SLO-SOL or approved equal. 9' Dome-roof shelter may be substituted for 13' shelter as approved by the Transit Manager, Tolar Model #9NALD-PM-SLO-SOL. NEC 690 Compliant Solar Lighting. 13' shelter shall include a 8' perforated metal bench, no back, and a minimum of one anti-vagrant bar. 9' Shelter, if approved, shall include a 4' perforated metal bench, no back, and one anti-vagrant bar. Color: RAL 5022. Shelter and bench to be bolted to concrete slab per manufacturer's recommendations. Available form Tolar Shelters (800) 339-6165 or approved equal. City may waive the requirement for the bus shelter if it is determined that the average number of boardings will be less than 8 riders per day. Shelter to be installed on a 4" thick reinforced Class 3 concrete slab over 4" Class 3 base. Width of slab shall extend beyond the edges of the shelter a minimum of 12". Reinforce with #4 rebar @ 24" O.C. each way. Shelter to be centered on slab, exclusive of trash container area, unless adjustment required to meet Note 6 or other site circumstance. Maintain a minimum sidewalk clearance of 4' from the face of curb to the front edge of the shelter and bench. Where trash container is required, provide and mount trash can container per Engineering Standard 9060. BUS STOP 4930 Drafting edits JDL MH 11-12 Add Trash Can note; Revise #5 JDL MH 5-13 edit 4 remove back KH MH 11-17 1 2 3 1 6 4 6 5 10'10'4'-6"2 3 4 5 6 7 48" 7 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: 30" MIN May 2018 Center of Median 2" Crown Median Cobble 3" to 4" Mortar Setting Bed 4" minimum non-expansive base Compacted Subgrade Width per plan SECTION Grout exposure shall be no more than 12" INSTALLATION NOTES: Cobble median work shall conform to to the provisions in Section 73, of the Standard Specifications. Contractor shall install cobble median in non-pedestrian locations of curb islands as indicated on plans. Concrete Curbs shall be installed per Engineering Standard 4020. Median Cobble shall be 2" to 6" Sound River Worn Granite cobbles, or approved equal, and shall not be of uniform diameter. Mortar shall comply with SECTION 51-1.02F "Mortar" of the Standard Specifications. Cobble base material shall be Class II aggregate base compacted to a relative compaction of 95%. Subgrade material shall be compacted to 90% relative compaction. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 67 3 4 5 RAISED COBBLESTONE MEDIAN 4940 New Standard JDL MH 5-13 Revised Note 1 SR BL 1-14 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 RETAINING WALL DRAINAGE 5020 Redrawn to CAD RMH WAP 1-95 New border JDL WAP 9-97 Rem. General Notes; Drafting editsJDL MH 4-13 WALL DRAINAGE: Place a 12" layer of course gravel against the back of the wall and provide a 34" weep hole (or omit the mortar from the vertical joint in block walls) just above the ground level at 32" o.c. No weep holes are to drain across a public sidewalk. OR Place a 3" diameter perforated pipe along the back of the wall with a 12" layer of gravel around it, set to drain at intermittent collection points. When a wall is constructed at back of a sidewalk, drainage must be directed underground to a new or existing conveyance system. Drainage can not outlet through curb face. REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 Sidewalk Backfill 24" WALL 16" WALL 8" WALL All dimensions in inches unless noted otherwise. 2 GENERAL NOTES: A.Height of wall is vertical difference between finished grades. B.All cells must be filled with grout. C.First block may be embedded in footing. D.Place a layer of coarse gravel against the back of the wall and at least 1 ft³ of gravel around each drain. E.These walls are designed to be used at the back of sidewalks but may be used elsewhere if the bottom of footing is at least 12" below finish grade. F.These walls may be made of Reinforced Concrete with a wall thickness of 6". G.Omit mortar from the vertical joints in first course above the ground at 32" on center for weep holes, except walls adjacent to back of public sidewalk where drain pipes must be installed as shown above. (See Engineering Standard 5020). H.For walls higher than 24", construction shall conform to the Department of Transportation Standard Plans for retaining walls for either concrete or masonry construction.818 4 8 6 714 2 8 4 64410 8 2 Steel: Vertical and Transverse - #3 @ 32" o.c. Longitudinal - #3 as shown Minimum Soil Bearing: 2000 psi (firm, dry soil of any type) Minimum Concrete Strength: Class 3 Footing should be set in firm, undisturbed soil. 2 12 3Grooved Beam Blocks 1 max. Concrete Cap 8x8x16 Conc. Blocks 2 dia. Galv. Iron Drain Pipe thru to curb face at 10' o.c. REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: SHORT RETAINING WALLS 5030 Revise title block; Concrete strengthSR BL 1-14 New border JDL WAP 9-97 Drafting edits JDL MH 12-12 May 2018 TREE ZONE R/W WATERGASSTREET WATERSEWERR/W PL L LP PL STORM DRAIN WATER SEWER GAS CL LC * RECYCLED WATER REC WTRUTILITIES LOCATION 6010 Rervised Depth Reference Point MH BL 11-09 Revise Note 4; Drafting edits JDL MH 11-12 Notes revised KH MH 1-17 Power pole, street light, phone pole or fire hyd. NOTES (cont'd): Hydrants shall be installed per Engineering Standards 6310 and 6315. 3' minimum horizontal clearance between unlike utility services. Gas lines shall share trench with wire utilities per plans or standards approved by all Utilities occupying trench, unless specifically allowed by the City. NOTES: Minimum vertical separation at all utility crossings shall be 6". All objects placed behind the curb face shall maintain a minimum horizontal clearance of 18" or as required by the applicable Engineering Standard. Maintain 5' minimum horizontal separation between utilities. Communication utilities shall be placed 3' minimum below crossing utilities or 7' below top of curb, whichever is deeper. See Engineering Standards 6110 and 6140 for Seperation Criteria. 6 7 8 Public Utilities vaults Fire hydrant, utility pole or street light on P 6 Curb line Back of sidewalk 10' from P on low side of lot (Avoid driveway) L 8 10'5' 18" min. 7 7 7 1 2 3 4 5 * * See Subdivision map for widths 20' max.20' max. Any utility to be placed within 20' of an existing 12" or larger tree shall receive special review and conditions. Street tree easement Public Utilities easement 2 NORTH or WEST side of street SOUTH or EAST side of street 3 5 5 5 8 3' min. 1 3' min. 3' min.5' min. 3' min. 3' min. Cable TV (2 min.) Secondary power Local Telephone Street Lights Primary power 1' 4 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: 8 May 2018 STORM SEWERWATERWATER RECYCLED CHRISTY G-5 or G-12 when specified REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: 1 INSTALLATION NOTES: All utility covers to be raised shall be replaced as needed to conform to covers specified above. Covers shall be imprinted with the appropriate utility name. Collars constructed in P.C.C. streets shall be circular in shape and shall be separated from the adjacent P.C.C. street by either a cold joint or a tin form. MANHOLES: Rings shall be 3" or 6". Top of cone to top of frame shall not exceed 18". Grade rings and manhole frame shall be sealed at every joint with butyl rubber (CONSEAL CS-102 or equal). When proper grade cannot be achieved with standard grade rings, the manhole frame shall be suspended in position over the last grade ring, the inside of the frame and shaft shall be formed with tube or monoform system, and the concrete collar shall be poured to provide the joint between the manhole frame and the grade ring stack. Inside of rings shall be grouted with non-shrink grout to obtain a smooth surface free from gaps, holes and sharp edges. 2" clearance applies to the low side of the frame. Clearance may be greater on the high side as dictated by the street grades and as directed by the City Engineer. Use 6" concrete reducing rings in cases where existing manhole opening must be reduced to accommodate the new frame and cover. GENERAL NOTES: A.Completely remove existing concrete collar prior to pouring new concrete collar. The diameter of the new collar shall be equal to the existing collar or the minimum diameter specified in the above detail, whichever is larger. B.Concrete shall be Class 2 concrete, troweled to street grade, and allowed to cure for 24 hours prior to any traffic use. Class 1 concrete with 2% non-corrosive polar set may be required to allow expedited traffic use following 4 hour cure time. C.Depth and radius dimensions shown apply to similar covers that are not shown. D.When a roadway is overlaid with asphalt concrete, the contractor may use extension rings to adjust utility covers to the new surface elevation. When extension rings are used to adjust grade, a preformed thermoplastic ring shall be applied around the perimeter of the concrete. Extension ring shall be compatible with the existing cover. Thermoplastic ring width shall be a minimum of 6 inches. E.Utility frame and cover shall be installed so that cover does not rock or rattle and is flush with adjacent surface. 2 3 PLAN WELLS SECTION WATER VALVE, SEWER CLEANOUT, MONUMENT, MONITORING, RECYCLED WATER MANHOLES STORM DRAIN, SANITARY SEWER UTILITY COVER GRADE ADJUSTMENT & P.C.C. COLLAR 6040 Update Note 2 WH BL 8-11 Add Note 7 DVB BL 11-08 Reorganize Notes; Add Note E JDL BL 6-12 CHRISTY G-4 or BROOKS 4-TT SOUTH BAY FOUNDRIES SBF-1900 or PHOENIX P-1090 with beveled edge sealed blind pickhole 1 10" 11 10" 10" PCC COLLAR 9"9" 24"2 2 2 2" ± 12" 3 10"10"12" PCC COLLAR FINISH GRADE (PAVEMENT SURFACE), TYP. 18" max. May 2018 Revise notes: B.c2, B.e Add F note Revised all Notes Consolidate 6110, 6120 & 6130 May 2018 WATER – SEWER SEPARATION CRITERIA TEXT 6110 SR BL 3-06 MH BL 1-14 JDL JDW 6-02 Page 1 CRITERIA FOR THE SEPARATION OF WATER MAINS AND SANITARY SEWERS NEW FACILITIES SEPARATION STANDARDS New water mains and sewer lines must comply with most recent version of the California Code of Regulations Section 64572 Title 22 Chapter 16. 1. Parallel Construction: The horizontal distance between pressure water mains and sewer must be at least 10 feet. 2. Perpendicular Construction (Crossing): Pressure water main must be at least 12 inches above sanitary sewer lines where these lines cross. 3. Separation distance is measured from the nearest edge of the facilities. 4. Water mains and sewer lines must not be installed in the same trench. EXCEPTIONS TO BASIC SEPARATION STANDARDS When local conditions or existing facilities create a situation where there is no alternative but to install water mains or sewer lines at a distance less than that required by the new facilities separation standards. In such cases, alternative construction criteria must be followed as allowed in the Department of Health Services Memorandum for Guidance Criteria for separation of water mains and non-potable pipelines. ALTERNATIVE CRITERIA FOR CONSTRUCTION The construction criteria for sewer lines or water mains where the Basic Separation Standards cannot be attained are shown in Figures 1 and 2, Engineering Standard 6140. There are two situations encountered: Case 1 -- New sewer line – new or existing water main. Case 2 -- New water main -- existing sewer line. For Case 1, the alternate construction criteria apply to the sewer line. For Case 2, the alternate construction criteria may apply to either or both the water main and sewer line. The construction criteria apply to the house laterals that cross above a pressure water main. House laterals crossing below water main must have 4 inches of separation between water main and lateral. CONSIDERATION OF RECYCLED WATER Recycled water mains must be treated as sewer mains when considering their separation from potable water. Recycled water mains must be treated as potable water mains when considering their separation from sewers. Revise notes: B.c2, B.e Add F note Revised all Notes Consolidate 6110, 6120 & 6130 May 2018 WATER – SEWER SEPARATION CRITERIA TEXT 6110 SR BL 3-06 MH BL 1-14 JDL JDW 6-02 Page 2 CASE 1 NEW SEWER MAIN BEING INSTALLED (See Figure 1, Engineering Standard 6140) ZONE SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIRED FOR SEWER A Sewer lines parallel to water mains shall not be permitted in this zone without approval from the responsible health agency and water supplier. B A sewer line placed parallel to a water line shall be constructed of: 1. Use HDPE pipe with fused joints. C A sewer line crossing a water main shall be constructed of: 1. Use HDPE pipe with fused joints. D A sewer line crossing a water main shall be constructed of: 1. User HDPE pipe with fused joints. CASE 2 NEW WATER MAIN BEING INSTALLED (See Figure 2, Engineering Standard 6140) ZONE SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIRED FOR WATER A No water mains parallel to sewers shall be constructed without approval from the health agency. B If the sewer paralleling the water main does not meet the Case 1, Zone B requirements, the water main shall be constructed of: 1. Ductile iron pipe 2. Class 200 PVC Pipe C If the sewer crossing the water main does not meet the Case 1, Zone C requirements, the water main shall have no joints in Zone C and be constructed of: 1. Ductile iron pipe 2. Class 200 PVC Pipe D If the sewer crossing the water main does not meet the Case 1, Zone D requirements, the water main shall have no joints within 4 feet from either side of the sewer and shall be constructed of: 1. Ductile iron pipe 2. Class 200 PVC Pipe CRITERIA FOR THE SEPARATION OF WATER MAINS AND SANITARY SEWERS CASE 1 NEW SEWER MAIN CASE 2 NEW WATER MAIN Figure 1 Figure 2 ZONE P ZONE D ZONE D ZONE P ZONE P ZONE P ZONE C ZONE C ZONE A ZONE A ZONE B ZONE B W ZONE P PARALLEL 1 2 S 1 2 ZONE B ZONE P ZONE B ZONE A ZONE A PARALLEL W S CROSSING CROSSING Refer to Engineering Standard 6110 for Separation Criteria Text WATER - SEWER SEPARATION CRITERIA DETAILS 6140 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 Reference to Std. #6110 JDL JDW 1-03 Revised Separation Note MH BL 8-07 NOTES AND DEFINITIONS ·DIMENSIONS are from the outside of water main to outside of sewer line or manhole. ·FUSED JOINT: The joining of sections of pipe using thermal or chemical bonding processes. ·HEALTH AGENCY: The State Department of Health Services. For those water systems supplying less than 200 service connections, the local health officer shall act for the Department of Health Services. ·HOUSE LATERAL: A sewer pipe connecting the building drain and the main sewer line. ·WATER SUPPLIER: Any person who owns or operates a public water system. 4" 12" 4" 4'7' 4'7' 4" 12" 4" ZONE P is a prohibited zone 6'3'12" 6'3'12" REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 3'WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS 6220 Renumber Notes SR BL 3-06 Renumber Notes; Drafting edits JDL MH 12-12 Revised part numbers JDL MH 3-13 5C 7A 7B 8B 8A City Valve Customer Valve 15 12 13 11 10 10" 9"9"3'14 Customer Valve12"9 11 15 12 13 8B City Valve 8A 9 10 14 Type (E) Service Main 1 PE Any 1 Copper Non-metal Type Extension (E)Service Main 2 Copper/PE PE Any Non-metal2Copper/PE Copper 2 PE Copper Any WATER SERVICE CONNECTION TO NEW MAIN 1 2 3 4 6 16 (E) ServiceExtension (E) Service GENERAL NOTES: A.If service line is lead, galvanized steel, or polybutylene, the entire service shall be replaced from the main to the meter per Engineering Standard 6210. B.Any meter boxes which do not meet current standards per Engineering Standard 6210 shall be upgraded to those standards. C.Households shall be notified at least one hour prior to water being shut off to make a connection. D.A 14 gauge insulated copper tracer wire shall be tied to the corp stop and taped to the service line at 7' intervals. The wire shall be soldered to the existing tracer wire or existing copper service. WATER SERVICE METER BOX RELOCATION 16 (E) Service 18 (E) Service 17 17 INSTALLATION NOTES: through - See Engineering Standard 6210. Add bell reducer and close nipple for existing 34" and 112" service lines. Compression to compression coupling, J-2609SG Water Main 1 4 6 16 Type 1 - New main is closer to curb than existing main. Type 2 -New main is further from curb than existing main. (PE = Polyethylene) INSTALLATION NOTES: and through - See Engineering Standard 6210. Compression to compression coupling, J-2609SG Extensions on services shall match existing size and material. service material shall conform to Engineering Standard 6210. 34" CTS tubing: Ford C44-33-Q-NL 1" CTS tubing: Ford C44-44-Q-NL 34" IPS tubing: Ford C66-33-Q-NL 1" IPS tubing: Ford C66-44-Q-NL 5 7 16 17 15 18 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 WELL ROW SIDEWALK REMOTE READER GENERAL NOTES: A.All commercial buildings served by public sewer and private well shall have the well metered for the purpose of assessing sewer charges. B.The well meter shall consist of a conventional meter set in the public right of way in accordance with City Engineering Standards. With prior written approval of the Utilities Department, a meter set near the well with a remote reader mounted to the building or other permanent structure will be allowed. C.The property owner shall pay all fees established for these purposes. D.The property owner shall execute a Private Well Metering Agreement with the City for ongoing operation, maintenance, inspection, calibration, and repair or replacement of the well meter and related City facilities. E.If a property receives water from both the public system and a private well, the customer will pay a sewer charge based on usage from both meters and a water charge based on usage from the public system meter. F.The City shall own, operate and maintain the meter, remote reader and associated wiring. All other facilities shall be the responsibility of the property owner. SEE ENGINEERING STANDARD 6210 FOR DETAILS CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.For properties receiving water from both a private well and the public system, an approved backflow prevention device shall be installed on the service connection to the public system. 2.The proposed location of the water meter and remote reader shall be approved by the City Utilities Department prior to installation. 3.The meter and related facilities shall be installed in accordance with applicable City Standards. The meter box shall be set with the long dimension parallel to the curb to differentiate them from other meters. 4.A conduit and pull rope shall be installed in accordance with the NEC and City Specifications and Standards. The conduit shall enter the water meter box in such a manner as to not interfere with the installation, removal, and inspection of the meter. The conduit shall be stubbed up at the building and secured to the building at no less than two locations. Both ends of the conduit shall be capped with a slip cap, not welded or glued. 5.A space shall be provided to allow the remote reader to be securely mounted at 5' above grade. 6.All work shall be performed by an appropriately licensed contractor with the exception of the meter set, pulling of remote read wires, and installation of a remote read unit which will be completed by City crews with a 48 hour notice. WELL METERING 6240 New Standard BL WAP 4-97 New Border JDL WAP 9-97 Drafting edits JDL MH 12-12 STANDARD CONFIGURATION ALTERNATE CONFIGURATION (must be approved by the Utilities Department) BUILDING SERVED BUILDING SERVED WELL WATER METER BOX WATER METER BOX Curb stop or Angle meter stop Water meter Meter box Customer valve Hardwire connection Remote read conduit Sidewalk or Collar Meter box 90 sweep Per NEC Per NEC 90 sweep Remote reader 34" Conduit Schedule 80 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 PLAN ELEVATION City side WATER METER WITH UNMETERED BYPASS 2" & LARGER 6250 Add Note 13 SR BL 8-11 Revised part numbers JDL MH 3-13 Revised Vault Note; Drafting editsJDL MH 12-12 NOTES: Service Saddle: Ford 202B Isolation Valve: Gate valve, resilient seated with fully encapsulated gate, FL x MJ Corp Stop: 2", Ford FB400-7-NL Ball Valve: 2", Ford B11-777-NL Copper Tubing: 2", Type K, soft, supported at 12" intervals 14 Bend: Sweat x Sweat MIP x Sweat Union FIP x Sweat 6" of 34" loose aggregate Unmetered bypass may be omitted when meter serves only irrigation uses. Attach Recycled Water Warning tag and adhesive warning decal per Engineering Standard 8810 when used for recycled water. All pipe joints from the water main to the city isolation valve in the meter vault shall be restrained. Vault base bottom METERS: Meters shall be centered in vault and supported per manufacturer's recommendations. Meter model and manufacturer to be approved by the City. VAULTS: Vaults shall be Armorcast #A6004872TA48SLO. Vaults in the Mission Style Sidewalk District shall be of a type to accommodate an iron-diamond plate or cast-iron lid. Vaults proposed for use in the District must be approved by the City Engineer prior to installation. Vaults may be required to be placed 90 degrees to the service to fit the sidewalk width. Vaults shall be placed a minimum of 12" behind the curb face, or in Mission Style sidewalk, behind the tile row. Spring-assisted vault cover lids shall bolt down. Multiple lids shall not be bolted down. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 10 12 13 12" min.12"min.Straight pipe spool, as needed (Not required) 12" min. 2 1 3 7 7 6 9 8 4 7 7 6"min.12 12 2 1 9 8 6 The bypass shall be as close to the meter body as feasible. Bypass not required for irrigation systems511 3 7 7 14 14 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 MANIFOLD MULTIPLE WATER SERVICES 6260 Renumber Notes SR BL 3-06 Drafting edits; Renumber Notes JDL MH 12-12 Add Note K DVB BL 11-07 FRONT VIEW END VIEW 1" 2" 12" APPROVED EQUAL ACCEPTED FOR ALL FITTINGS * 1 2 3 4 6 4 2" 5C / 5P 5C * 2" copper shall extend beyond the gutter before transition to polyethylene. Transition may be omitted if service is all copper. 24" CL to CL 17 16 15 8 5C 5C 1" 5C 5C 18 9 11 10 14 19 12 13 8 18 3' GENERAL NOTES: A.through H.: See Engineering Standard 6210. I.Each 2" service line shall serve no more than four (4) 1" meters or six (6) 34" meters. Meters larger than 1" shall be served by separate 2" service lateral unless an alternative configuration is approved by the City Engineer. If installing more than four (4) meters on a single manifold, angle meter stops shall be 1" x 34" outlet to prevent future up-sizing of meters. J. Extra tracer wire shall be coiled in the meter box closest to the service line. K. When replacing an existing manifold, the customer side, including valves and laterals, shall be reconstructed as needed to transition to existing lateral. Customer valve shall be replaced with a new valve in these cases. L.Open trench water service replacements shall be installed perpendicular to the existing water main, when as measured along the main,the existing water service is offset 5' or more from perpendicular.INSTALLATION NOTES: through 7 and 9 through 14 : See Engineering Standard 6210. 1" angle meter stop: FORD KV13-444W-NL Copper tee, all sweat: 2" x 2", Service line shall be at or near center of manifold. Copper tee, all sweat: 2" x 1" Copper reducing ell, sweat x sweat: 2" x 1" Adaptor, sweat x MIP Each service shall be designated to an address and/or unit by attaching a 112" brass tag with 14" minimum letters/numbers to the curb stop with a non-ferrous wire. Meter boxes shall be in alphabetical or numerical order with respect to address, reading left to right when facing the structure. 1 8 15 16 17 18 WATER MAIN 19 7B REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 ANCHORING TEESIDEWALKFIG. C FIG. BSIDEWALK GUTTERGUTTERTAPPING TEE FIG. ASIDEWALK GUTTERINSTALLATION NOTES: Hydrant shall have 6-hole flange, all bronze body and bronze caps: Jones 3760, Clow 2060 or approved equal. Outlets shall be manufacturer's 212" National Standard hose thread and 412" National Standard thread. 412" outlet shall point toward street. Hydrant shall be bagged until it is available for use. Hydrant shall be painted with Sherwin Williams ALLY 237 Industrial Enamel - Safety Yellow Base or an approved equal. Hydrant shall be located behind sidewalk if sufficient right-of-way exists (Fig. A), or behind curb (Figs. B and C). If located behind sidewalk, 12" minimum clearance shall be provided between back of sidewalk and outlet cap nut. Install hydrant reflector(s) per Engineering Standard 7920. Standard setback from curb face is 18" to 21". Sidewalk shall have a minimum of 42" of clearspace. When located in unpaved area, hydrant installation shall include 4' x 4' x 6" minimum PCC pad doweled into curb and sidewalk with #4 @ 18" o.c and one #4 rebar hoop. Hydrant shall be installed to provide 3" min. to 4" max. clearance between underside of flange and sidewalk surface, and shall have 58" x 3" drilled break-away bolts installed, with nuts on top of flange and bolts filled with silicone or butyl caulk. Thrust block, Class 3 PCC, shielded from flanges and bolts. Tracer wire shall be brought to the surface with a minumum of 18" above finished grade. See Engineering Standard 6340 and Trench Details. NOTES (cont'd): Cut-in tee, MJ x MJ x Flange. If regular line run tee is used, a swivel x solid adapter (pup) shall be used. See Engineering Standard 6320. Gate valve, Flange x MJ, resilient seated with fully-encapsulated gate, epoxy- coated inside and outside, full-size waterway, open to the left, non-rising stem with O-ring seals, AVK, CLOW F-6100, or approved equal, and shall conform to AWWA Standard C-509. See Engineering Standard 6340 for valve, valve well and collar details. Tapping sleeve, ROMAC SST - stainless steel, or approved equal. Laterals shall be Class 200 PVC or ductile iron, 6" min. diameter. 5 R/WR/WR/W3 4 5 11 11 7 9 8 13 13 10 10 12 7 1 6 7 FIRE HYDRANT FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY 6310 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 Revised Notes 2 & 5 DVB BL 10-06 Revised Note 8 MH BL 11-09 2 1 8 6 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 TO HYDRANT WATER MAIN WATER MAIN REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 ANCHORING TEESIDEWALKFIG. C FIG. BSIDEWALK GUTTERGUTTERTAPPING TEE FIRE HYDRANT FIG. ASIDEWALK GUTTERRECYCLED WATER HYDRANT ASSEMBLY 6315 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 Revised Note 8 MH BL 11-09 Revised Note 2 (color)JDL MH 9-12 INSTALLATION NOTES: Hydrant shall have 4" inlet, tapered IPT female with one 212" NSHT male outlet, cap and chain with pentagon stem nut: Jones H.P. or approved equal. Outlet shall be pointed toward street. Hydrant shall be rated for 200 psi design pressure. Hydrant shall be primed for paint with Sherwin Williams B54-Y38 011 base or an approved equal. Hydrant shall be painted with Sherwin-Williams Verve Violet (SW 6979). Hydrant shall be located behind sidewalk if sufficient right-of-way exists (Fig. A), or behind curb (Figs. B and C). If located behind sidewalk, 12" minimum clearance shall be provided between back of sidewalk and outlet cap nut. Standard setback from curb face is 18" to 21". Sidewalk shall have a minimum of 42" of clearspace. When located in unpaved area, hydrant installation shall include 4' x 4' x 6" minimum PCC pad doweled into curb and sidewalk with #4 @ 18" o.c. Hydrant shall be installed to provide 3" min. to 4" max. clearance between underside of flange and sidewalk surface, and shall have 58" x 312" drilled break-away bolts installed, with nuts on top of flange and bolts filled with silicone or butyl caulk. Hydrant assembly shall include 6" x 4" reducer and 4" DIP spool FLG x 4" IPT male. Thrust block, Class 3 PCC, shielded from flanges and bolts. Tracer wire shall be brought to the surface with a minumum of 18" above finished grade. See Engineering Standard 6340 and Trench Details. NOTES (cont'd): Cut-in tee, MJ x MJ x Flange. If regular line run tee is used, a swivel x solid adapter (pup) shall be used. See Engineering Standard 6320. Gate valve, Flange x MJ, resilient seated with fully-encapsulated gate, epoxy- coated inside and outside, full-size waterway, open to the left, non-rising stem with O-ring seals, AVK, CLOW F-6100, or approved equal, and shall conform to AWWA Standard C-509. See Engineering Standard 6340 for valve, valve well and collar details. Tapping sleeve, ROMAC SST - stainless steel, or approved equal. Laterals shall be ductile iron pipe, 6" dia., Class 52, sleeved with purple polyethylene warning encasement (Christy's Polywrap or equal). Plastic warning tape, 3" min. width, with black printing on a purple field having the words "CAUTION: RECYCLED WATER - DO NOT DRINK", installed in trench backfill per Engineering Standards 6020, 6025 and 6030. 5 R/WR/WR/W3 4 5 11 11 7 9 8 13 13 10 10 12 7 1 6 2 8 7 630"4 6 TO HYDRANT WATER MAIN WATER MAIN 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 METHOD 1 No. of ALL-THREADS (min.) 4 6, 8, 10 12, 14 over 14 2 4 6 TO BE DETERMINED IN FIELD OFFSET IN-LINE BOLT HOLE ALIGNMENT METHOD 1 VALVE to FITTING RESTRAINT 6320 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 Method 1, thrust block MDW WAP 10-93 Revised Note in Method #1 DVB BL 11-06 PIPE SIZE (inches) VALVES ADJACENT TO FITTINGS SHALL BE RESTRAINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING METHODS LISTED BELOW: METHOD 1 -May be used only with in-line bolt alignment of valve and fitting. See chart below for number of all-threads. All-threads and nuts shall be stainless steel and shall be coated with Henry's #204 roof cement, or equal. this method may be used only with approval of the City Utilities Department. METHOD 2 -May be used with either offset or in-line bolt alignment. METHOD 3 -Flange-to-flange bolted connection may be used. METHOD 4 -Retainer glands may be used with ductile iron pipe only, subject to City aproval. Retainer glands may NOT be used on fire hydrant laterals. METHOD 5 -Swivel gland and integral retaining lip connections may be used. VALVE DUG LUG GLAND T-BOLT and NUT ALL-THREAD PUP FITTING METHOD 2 SWIVEL x SOLID ADAPTOR T-BOLT and NUT SWIVEL GLAND CLASS 3 PCC THRUST BLOCK, SHIELDED FROM BOLTS AND FLANGES SOLID RUBBER GASKET REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 CUT-IN HOT TAP WATERLINE TIE-IN 6330 Rev. Tapping Sleeve Romac NoteSR BL 1-14 Change Cast iron to Ductile iron JDL MH 2-14 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 1 1/2 dia. 18" min. 1 1/2 dia. 18" min. TAPPING SLEEVE - ROMAC STT stainless steel or approved equal. Prior to tapping the water main, the tapping sleeve and valve shall be attached to the water main and pressure tested for five minutes at 150 psi. Tapping sleeve shall be separated from nearest bell, flange, service clamp, corp stop, etc. by a distance no less than 112 pipe diameters, with a minimum of 18". TAPPING SLEEVE - Gate valve, resilient seated with fully encapsulated gate, epoxy-coated inside and outside, full-size waterway, open to the left, non-rising stem with O-ring seals, 200 psi working pressure, and meets AWWA C-509. AVK, CLOW 6100 or approved equal. New line and tapping sleeve must be at least one size smaller than the existing main. Valve required at all branch lines SPACER (wedding band) shall be installed. Inspection required. SOLID SLEEVE - Ductile iron, MJ x MJ, 12" min. length SOLID RUBBER GASKET T-BOLT GLAND Where valve end is MJ, a valve to fitting restraint shall be used (see Engineering Standard 6320). TEE, CROSS, VALVE, etc. 6" MIN. THRUST BLOCK - Class 3 PCC, shielded from bolts and flanges REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: THRUST BLOCK - Class 3 PCC, shielded from bolts and flanges. Sized as appropriate for test pressure and and soil type. May 2018 WATERWATER RECYCLED SECTION A-A WATER VALVE 10" or Smaller Mains: Gate valve, MJxMJ, resilient, seated with fully encapsulated gate, epoxy-coated inside and outside, full-size waterway, open to the left, non-rising stem with 0-ring seals, 200 psi. working pressure, and meet AWWA C-509. AVK, CLOW F-6100 or approved equal. 12" or Larger Mains: MJxMJ, butterfly valve, Dresser 450, Mueller Line Seal Ill, or approved equal. WATER VALVE & WELL 6340 Add recycled water cover SR BL 3-06 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 Fabric type JDL MH 9-12 10" TRAFFIC VALVE WELL & COVER CHRISTY G-5 or approved equal. Cover shall be imprinted with "WATER" Pavement 18" of Tracer wire rolled inside utility well Tracer wire per Eng. Std. 6020 PVC waterline spigots 12" and larger shall be beveled on inside for butterfly valve vane clearance 10" REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: Collar shall be constructed per Engineering Standard 6040 CHRISTY G-4, BROOKS 4-TT, or approved equal, imprinted with "RECYCLED WATER" when used for recycled water. AAAA May 2018 BLOW-OFF ASSEMBLY 6350 New Border JDL WAP 9-97 Revised Reducer Detail MH BL 10-05 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 GENERAL NOTE: Protect all fittings with plastic and pour thrust block at end of street main, shape and location to be determined in field. THRUST BLOCK 12" x 4" SPOOL 4" RESILIENT SEATED VALVEPLAIN END PIPE PIPE SIZE x 4" FLG x FLG REDUCER SPOOL LENGTH WILL VARY 4" THREADED FLANGE ADAPTER SEE ENGINEERING STANDARD 6340 FOR WATER WELL INFORMATION, TYP. COMPANION FLANGE WITH 2" TAP AND PLUG (IP THREAD) REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 typ. 1 (typ. all around)120°120°120° WATER MAIN Back of sidewalk(curb face)18"334"AIR/VAC RELEASE VALVE ASSEMBLY 1" & 2" 6360 Update Note 1 SR BL 8-11 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 Revise Note 17 JDL MH 9-12 2"1"min.9 1" min.min.18 14 13 12 20 2 15 3 16 17 7 2"min.214196 5108 10 11 5 Connection plumbing to slope up towards Air Release Valve at minumum grade of 1% Drill 58" dia hole INSTALLATION NOTES : Crispin Universal Air Release Valve: Model UL10.1 (1"), UL20.1 (2"), UL30.1 (3"), UL40.1 (4") or approved equal. Nipple: Brass, short Ball Valve: Jones J-1905 Nipple: Brass, 10". Protect from contact with two layers of 3-mil tape Elbow: Brass, 90° Cadmium plated bent bolts 12" dia. (typ. 3 places) with nuts Angle: Galvanized steel 112" x 112" x 14", 2" long (typ. 3 places) Copper Tubing: Type K, soft. Encase in purple recycled water polyethylene warning sleeve when used for recycled water. The assembly shall be set behind the sidewalk where adequate right-of-way exists and in all new developments. Where adequate righ-of-way does not exist, the assembly should be set back behind the curb a minimum of 18" or behind the tile row in the Mission Sidewalk District. Where adequate space is not available between the assembly and the back of sidewalk to provide required ADA pass by clearance, approval of the location must be made by the City Engineer. Coupling: Jones J2605SG or Mueller H-15428 Corporation Stop: Jones J-1944 or Mueller B-2996 Street Elbow: Galvanized Nipple: 10" galvanized Elbow: Galvanized Nipple: 10" galvanized 10 ga. steel, minimum wall thickness of tubing Paint with zinc-oxide primer and 2 coats of Sherwin Williams Emerald Ice (SW 4069). Use Sherwin Williams Verve Violet (SW 6979) for recycled water. Drill minimum of six (6) 12" diameter holes on circumference evenly spaced. PCC Slab: 30" x 30" x 4" thick on a 4" Class 3 base Attach Recycled Water Warning Tag and adhesive decal per Engineering Standard 8810 when used for recycled water. One (1) #4 rebar hoop Weld cover plate Weld 58" dia. nut (min. Grade 5) to bottom of cover plate 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 12" min. 18" max. GENERAL NOTES: A.All fittings and risers smaller than 3" diameter shall be copper or brass. Fittings and risers larger than 3" shall be ductile iron pipe internally cement lined for fire service and wrapped with two layers of UPC listed plastic tape minimum 112" or coated with Henry's #204 plastic roof cement or an approved equal. B.Materials shall be UL listed for fire service. C.Materials shall be inspected by Fire Department prior to installation. D.Fire line shall be tested in accordance with Section 76, "Waterlines" of the City Standard Specifications. No connections may be made until water samples have been tested and approved. E.Location of double check and FDC shall be approved by Fire Department prior to placement. F.Wrap bolts with 14" plastic sheathing prior to placement of thrust blocks. G.Provide clearances around device per manufacturer's recommendations and adequate access for testing. H.When adequate space does not exist between the public right-of-way and the building face, the USC approved backflow prevention device may be installed inside the building on the fire sprinkler riser (refer to Engineering Standard 6590 for underground portion.) The backflow preventer shall be located no further than 20' from the street side property line. Other USC-approved devices may appear different than those shown. Exterior installations shall have OS&Y valves. Devices installed inside buildings may have indicating butterfly valves. I.Double Check Detector meters shall be supplied with registers that measure in "units" (100 cu.ft.) DOUBLE CHECK BACKFLOW PREVENTER 2" to 10" 6420 Add Note 8 DVB BL 10-07 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 Revised Note H and 1 DVB BL 11-06 INSTALLATION NOTES: Backflow preventer shall be approved by the University of Southern California Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research for the proposed application. Backflow preventer shall include OS&Y valves. Backflow preventers that are USC-approved with butterfly valves may be used with prior written approval of the Fire Marshall when installed inside a building. Each valve shall include a tamper device for electronic monitoring. Junction boxes shall have tamper-proof screws. All risers and above ground mainline fittings shall be flange type, epoxy coated inside or cement mortar lined. Class 3 PCC pad, 4" thick, 12" minimum around risers, on 4" Class 3 base. Break-away padlock and chain between OS&Y valves, locked in open position. Valve setter or PCC thrust blocks, Class 3, size as required for type of soil. Tracer wire from street valve or double check assembly to hydrant and/or building sprinkler riser per Engineering Standard 6020. ANY MODIFICATION TO FIRE DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS MUST HAVE WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE FIRE DEPARTMENT. DOUBLE CHECK DETECTOR Use when on-site system includes fire hydrants (4" - 10" only) DOUBLE CHECK No on-site hydrants (2" - 10")DOUBLE CHECK W/ FDC When requested by Fire Department (4" - 10" only) 6 6 6 5 5 5 7 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 7 7 4 3 2 1 Fire Department connection UL listed single check valve 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 FIRE A B A B VIEW A-A VIEW B-B FIRE SPRINKLER VALVE AND WELL 2" 6520 Tracing Wire note MH BL 11-09 Note 1; Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 Compression fitting SR JDW 10-03 2 1 3 INSTALL TRACER WIRE FOR PIPE IN PUBLIC R.O.W. PER ENGINEERING STANDARD 6020 WITH COIL IN GATEWELL. SECURE BY TAPING TO SERVICE PIPE EVERY 6' (MAX.) 8" MIN. DIA. PVC RISER, ONE CONTINUOUS PIECE (NO JOINTS) PVC, PE OR METALLIC PIPE SIDEWALK OR CLASS 2 PCC COLLAR AROUND VALVE WELL AS PER ENG. STD. 6040 LID MARKED "FIRE" CHRISTY G-5 TRAFFIC VALVE, WELL AND LID CURB OR HEADER 10" 3' INSTALLATION NOTES: 2" BALL VALVE, JONES J-1921 SG OR FORD B41-777G, OR APPROVED EQUAL WITH MINIMUM 300 PSI WORKING PRESSURE RATING. POLYETHYLENE TUBING, SDR-9, 200 PSI WESFLEX OR EQUAL. 2 EACH, 2" x 4" x 12" REDWOOD RISER SUPPORTS. 1 2 3 THIS STANDARD TO BE USED ONLY WHERE FIRE DEPARTMENT APPROVED "TELEPHONE LEASE LINE ALARM SYSTEM" IS INSTALLED. OTHERWISE, A DETECTOR CHECK ASSEMBLY IS REQUIRED. REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 A FIRE A SECTION A-A THIS DETAIL APPLIES TO NEW FIRE SERVICE ON NEW OR EXISTING WATER MAIN. PL NEW FIRE SERVICE 4" 6530 Temp G-5 box to BOW JDL JDW 1-03 Larger riser MH BL 12-08 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 1 2 GENERAL NOTES: A.All work, including trenching, backfill, compaction, and testing of materials shall be performed per Project Specifications and as shown on this detail. B.After completion of testing, valve shall be closed, temporary blow-off capped and the area resurfaced. C.G-5 box in/behind sidewalk shall be removed at time of fire line connection to building. INSTALLATION NOTES: Alternate location where building abuts sidewalk allowed only with written approval of Utilities Department. Temporary cap shall be removed at the time the service is connected to the fire sprinkler system. USC approved backflow prevention device shall be installed per Engineering Standard 6420. 1 2 WATER MAIN 2" Galv. Cap to match fireline, tapped for blow-off 4" PVC Class 200, length varies 4" Valve per Eng. Std. 6340Main size x 4" Tee Thrust Block 8" min. dia. riser, SDR 35 PVC, one continuous piece (no joints) Pressure treated Fir, 2"x4", from valve to within 6" of surface, used only when service will be inactive for some time. Remove block when service is activated. COLLAR: Class 2 PCC trowelled to street grade and allowed to cure for 48 hours prior to full traffic use. TRAFFIC VALVE WELL & COVER CHRISTY G-5, or approved equal. Cover shall be imprinted with "FIRE". Valve well and cover per Engineering Standard 6340. Pavement (E) PCC curb and sidewalk Tracer wire per Eng. Std. 6340 Cap 2" Galv. Thrust Block 24" min.4" - 12" REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 DIRECTION OF FLOW DIRECTION OF FLOW R.P. BACKFLOW PREVENTER 3/4" to 10" 6550 Rev Note "E"KH MH 11-17 Added Note K MH BL 11-09 Drafting edits JDL BL 6-12 GENERAL NOTES: A.Pipe and fittings shall be brass or copper when diameter is between 34" and 3" and DI for pipe larger than 3". DI pipe shall be wrapped with two layers of UPC listed plastic tape minimum 40 mil or coated with Henry's #204 plastic roof cement or approved equal. Resilient seated shut off valves and test cocks are required. B.For 34" through 2" lines, the customer valve in the water meter box shall be eliminated. C.The mechanical backflow prevention assembly shall be installed subject to the approval of the County of San Luis Obispo Cross-Connection Inspector. Any deviation from this standard must receive approval prior to installation. D.All mechanical backflow prevention assemblies approved by the County Cross-Connection Inspector for installation at the service connection have been evaluated and approved by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research, University of Southern California. These assemblies are only approved for the horizontal orientation, unless specifically evaluated and approved by the local Health Department for other orientations. Check with the local Health Department. E.Choice of type of backflow prevention assembly, i.e. reduced pressure principle or double check valve assembly, will be based on the degree of hazard as evaluated by the County Cross-Connection Inspector. 1.Non-Residential Parcels - All domestic or irrigation services for non-residential parcels shall use a reduced pressure principle (RP) backflow preventer assembly. 2.Multi-Family - Multi-family housing units having greater that 4 units, attached or detached, shall have an RP backflow prevention assembly. 3.Non-Potable Irrigation - Non-potable irrigation systems using a pressure pump, including grey water system, shall install new RP backflow prevention assemblies to all water or irrigation water meters within the parcel. 4.Single Family - Single family units within R1 Zones shall have backflow prevention device in accordance with the plumbing and building code. F.Backflow preventer shall be located within 10' of water meter and no connections or tees are allowed between the meter and the assembly. G.No wye strainers are allowed before the No. 2 shut off valve. H.See Engineering Standard 6210 for meter and service details up to 2". I.Riser pipes shall include unions for sizes 34" through 2". J.34" - 2" RPB shall be lead free FEBCO 825YA or approved equal. 4" - 10" RPB shall be lead free Wilkins model 375 or approved equal. K.Class 3 PCC pad, 4" thick, 12" minimum surrounding backflow preventer, on 4" class 3 base. L.Backflow preventer shall have 24" of separation from other devices perpendicular to the flow direction. 34" - 2" SIZE 4" - 10" SIZE12" min.18" max.See Note "K" below 12" min.18" max.REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 24" min.18" min. 36" max. 6" 12" min. sand cover 4" sand bed CL FIRE MAIN BUILDING CONNECTION 6590 Use of tracer wire JDL WAP 1-00 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 Note revisions per Fire DepartmentJDL WAP 9-97 GENERAL NOTES: A.Fire line shall be tested in accordance with Section 76, "WATERLINES" of the City Standard Specifications. NO CONNECTION MAY BE MADE UNTIL WATER SAMPLES HAVE BEEN TESTED AND APPROVED. B.Location of fire sprinkler riser shall be approved by the Fire Department. C.Materials shall be UL listed for fire service. D.Wrap bolts with 6 mil plastic sheathing prior to placement of thrust block(s). E.All fittings and risers shall be ductile iron, internally cement lined for fire service, and wrapped with two layers of UPC listed plastic tape (minimum 40 mil) or coated with Henry's #204 plastic roof cement or an approved equal. UL listed fire main (min. 4") Class 200 PVC or approved equal UL listed Flanged Coupling Adaptor fitting (PVC to DI) or an approved equal DI spool length as required within the bearing area of foundation PCC thrust block,size as required for type of soil Stainless steel bolts or coat all exposed bolts and threads with Henry's #204 plastic roof cement or approved equal Tracer wire from street valve to sprinkler riser per Engineering Standard 6020 DI spool (height as required) 2" Foundation PVC or equal spacer to provide 2" clearance between riser and concrete slab Exterior wall Foundation 30"36" min. at areas subjectto vehicle traffic45° min. REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 COVER: Manhole frame and cover shall have a 24" clear opening and a sealed blind pick hole and no side pick hole. (Phoenix Iron works P-1090 or approved equal). Frame and cover shall be a 10.5% machined matched fit. The cover shall be lettered "SANITARY SEWER". The inside of the frame shall be grouted with non-shrink grout. ADJUSTMENT TO GRADE: Adjust to grade per Engineering Standard 6040. COLLAR: Collar shall be constructed per Engineering Standard 6040. CONE: Cone shall be concentric and conform to the requirements for risers. Eccentric cone may be used only in special cases with the prior written approval of the Utilities Department. MANHOLE RISERS: Manhole risers shall be precast concrete conforming to ASTM C-478 and shall have a 6" minimum wall thickness with minimal reinforcements. Manholes shall be 4' in diameter unless the size and/or number of inlet(s) and outlet(s) warrants the use of a 5' diameter manhole. JOINTS: Joints shall be set with butyl rubber sealant (RUB-R-NEK). Inside of joints shall be grouted with non-shrink grout. Manhole shall be sealed with an external rubber sleeve (9" Infi-Shield Gator Wrap or approved equal). The application shall form a continuous seal that applies inward pressure on the protected joint for the life of the application. BASE: Manhole base shall be precast reinforced Class 3 concrete with extended base and conform to the requirements for manhole risers. All pipe connections' size, angle, depth and quantity shall be field verified and measured prior to ordering precast base. All pipe connections shall be cored to fit flexible connectors (KOR-N-SEAL or equal) either by manufacturer or contractor using approved equipment. Gaps and holes between manhole base and pipe connections shall be filled with non-shrink grout. The precast base shall be bedded on a minimum of 6" of well graded crushed rock over native material that is either undisturbed or compacted to 95%. (See Standard Specification Section 26-1.02F for crush rock requirements. INVERT: Invert shall be completed in a single pour using Class 3 concrete with steel trowel finish. Any change in direction shall be a fixed radius curve extending from the inlet wall to the outlet wall. Inside surface of invert and area between pipe connection and channel shall be free from gaps, holes and sharp edges. All inlets shall be designed and installed such that the top of pipe elevations match as much as possible. TESTING: See Standard Specifications Section 77-3.03G for Vacuum Test Requirements. A A SEWER MANHOLE 6610 Manhole Cover and Joint SealantJDL DA 10-15 Revise Testing, delete tables SR MH 1-14 Revised BASE Note JDL BL 6-12 SECTION A-A 6" 4' or 5'6" min.6"min.3"typ.4"min.Varies32"24"Select BackfillDepth varies90% Compaction24"95% Comp.REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 COVER: Manhole frame and cover shall have a 24" clear opening and a sealed blind pickhole (Phoenix Iron works P-1090 or approved equal). Frame and cover shall be a 10.5% machined matched fit. The cover shall be lettered "SANITARY SEWER". The inside of the frame shall be grouted with non-shrink grout. ADJUSTMENT TO GRADE: Adjust to grade per Engineering Standard 6040. COLLAR: Collar shall be constructed per Engineering Standard 6040. CONE: Cone shall be concentric and conform to the requirements for risers. Eccentric cone may be used only in special cases with the prior written approval of the Utilities Department. MANHOLE RISERS: Manhole risers shall be precast concrete conforming to ASTM C-478 and shall have a 6" minimum wall thickness with minimal reinforcements. Manholes shall be 4' in diameter unless the size and/or number of inlet(s) and outlet(s) warrants the use of a 5' diameter manhole. JOINTS: Joints shall be set with butyl rubber sealant (RUB-R-NEK). Inside of joints shall be grouted with non-shrink grout. BASE: Manhole base shall be precast reinforced Class 3 concrete with extended base and conform to the requirements for manhole risers. All pipe connections' size, angle, depth and quantity shall be field verified and measured prior to ordering precast base. All pipe connections shall be cored to fit flexible connectors (KOR-N-SEAL or equal) either by manufacturer or contractor using approved equipment. Gaps and holes between manhole base and pipe connections shall be filled with non-shrink grout. The precast base shall be bedded on a minimum of 6" of well graded crushed rock over native material that is either undisturbed or compacted to 95%. See Section 26-1.02 for crush rock requirements. INVERT: Invert shall be completed in a single pour using Class 3 concrete with steel trowel finish. Any change in direction shall be a fixed radius curve extending from the inlet wall to the outlet wall. Inside surface of invert and area between pipe connection and channel shall be free from gaps, holes and sharp edges. All inlets shall be designed and installed such that the top of pipe elevations match as much as possible. TESTING: See Section 77-3.03G for Vacuum Test Requirements. SEWER DROP MANHOLE 6620 Notes revision KH MH 1-17 Apprv by Utilities KH MH 11-17 Revise Base,Testing; Delete tablesSR BL 1-14 SECTION A-A 6" 4' or 5'6" min.6"min.Select Backfill90% Compaction24"95%Comp.24" TYPE 'B' DROP INLET TYPE 'A' DROP INLET TYPE "B" SHALL BE USED ONLY WHEN APPROVED BY UTILITIES DEPARTMENT A A Provide smooth transition 4" min.32"4'Varies2- Sack Concrete Slurry 6" min.6" min.Match tops of pipes A 6" min.A Pipe lengths can vary depending on amount of drop 6" min.(typ.)REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: (FOR VERTICAL DROPS GREATER THAN 30")May 2018 DIMENSIONS 8 10 12 15 18 TOP VIEW END VIEW SIDE VIEW MANHOLE INSTALLATION INLET OUTLET 1058 SEWER MANHOLE SAND TRAP 6650 New Border JDL WAP 9-97 Redrawn to CAD JDL WAP 12-93 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 GENERAL NOTES: A.Sand traps shall be used in all manholes where manhole tops are adjusted due to street grade changes or paving operations and where sewerline is being constructed. B.Sand traps shall be in place throughout construction and shall be removed only after sand and all non-seweage debris have been removed from affected sewerline(s), subject to inspection of Utilities Department. C.Use of any other type of san trap shall have prior approval of the Utilities Department.Sand trap to be inserted into outlet pipe of designated manhole(s), or the nearest manhole downstream from construction. SAND TRAP 20 GA. GALV. SHEET METAL CRIMPING LENGTH LENGTH DIAMETER 1/2" 1258 1534 1818 1878 DIAMETER (in) LENGTH (in) DIAMETER INTERLOCKED SEAMS INTERLOCKED SEAMS REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 SEWER AA SECTION A-A CLEANOUTS ARE NOT ALLOWED ON NEW MAIN CONSTRUCTION. SEWER CLEANOUT & WELL 6710 Plug removed JDL DA 10-15 Revise bottom Note SR BL 1-14 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 OPTION 1 14 Long-Radius Bend OPTION 2 (2)- 18 Bends, 12" apart12"Pavement 10" 10" 4" min. 1" min., typ. COLLAR: Collar shall be constructed per Engineering Standard 6040 TRAFFIC VALVE WELL and COVER: CHRISTY G-5 for pipes 6" diameter. CHRISTY G-12 for pipes larger than 6" diameter. Cover shall be imprinted with "SEWER". REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 GENERAL NOTES: A.City Utilities Department will install all new wyes on existing sewer mainlines. B.Sewer lateral repair must comply with section 77-3.03F(3) of the Standard Specifications. C.Install backwater trap or backwater valve in compliance with municipal code section 13.08.200. INSTALLATION NOTES: 1 Factory-fabricated wye in sewer main, with 1/8 bend. Bend shall point downstream and enter main at a vertical angle of not less than 5° or more than 45°. 2 Sewer lateral pipe and fittings must comply with sections 77-3.02A(5) and 77-3.02B(5) of the Standard Specifications. 3 Top of curb shall be marked with an "S" directly over lateral. The "S" shall be stamped in new concrete or chiseled into existing concrete and shall not be less than 3" long, 2" wide and 316" deep. 4 When non-metallic pipe is used, magnetic tracer tape must be placed in trench over lateral from sewer main to cleanout at a depth of 12". 5 Depth of lateral must not be less than 3' or greater than 5' deep from top of pipe to finished surface unless alternate stronger pipe material is used. 6 Refer to Engineering Standards 6110 and 6140 for separation requirements with waterlines. 7 A cleanout shall be installed if called for on the plans or for new laterals where the distance between the right-of-way and the building is greater than 100' or where no cleanout exists at the building. The cleanout shall consist of one-way cleanout wye, riser, and cleanout fitting with plug. Tee shall be plugged at night during construction and left plugged when backfilled if not tied to user. THIS STANDARD APPLIES TO NEW AND MODIFIED LATERALS. THE ABOVE REQUIREMENTS MAY BE MODIFIED OR WAIVED ONLY WITH THE APPROVAL OF THE CITY UTILITIES DEPARTMENT. 1 3 7 4 S5 6 SEWER MAIN WATER MAIN SEWER MAIN GUTTER SIDEWALK PLAN VIEW SECTION >100' to bldg. 2 3 2 1 712"5 5° - 45° SEWER LATERAL 6810 Revise all notes MH BL 1-14 Rev Note 2, Plan View SR MH 3-12 Tracer tape depth JDL MH 9-12 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 CUL-DE-SAC *DEVIATIONS FROM THESE STANDARDS MUST BE APPROVED BY THE CITY. CURB FACE RIGHT-OF-WAY NEW CUL-DE-SAC REQUIREMENTS* 7020 New Standard JDL JDW 1-05 Modify Curb Radius DVB BL 10-06 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 INSTALLATION NOTES: Radius to curb face: Residential Areas = 40'; Commercial Areas = 45' Radius to right-of-way shall conform to the ROW requirements in Engineering Standard 1010. Cul-de-sac lengths shall be as restricted by Engineering Standard 1010. 1 2 1 2 3 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 2% CLASS I BIKEWAY (PATH) 7040 Modify Section & Add Paving GridDVB BL 1-14 Add Note 5 DVB MH 11-08 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 INSTALLATION NOTES: Bicycle path shall be constructed with 4" AC over 12" Class 2 base. AC aggregate to be 12" maximum, medium gradation installed in two 2" lifts. Pavement reinforcing grid (Glasgrid 8502, STARgrid G-PS 200-100, or approved equal) to be installed full with of pathway between lifts. Pathway to contain a uniform cross slope of 2%. Thickness of shoulder to match bottom of Class 2 base under pathway. Pathway to contain a 4" dashed yellow centerline stripe and two 4" solid white stripes centered 6" from each edge of the pathway. 12' paved width is typical. See the City of San Luis Obispo Bicycle Transportation Plan for additional design standards. 13' wide triaxial geogrid (Tensar TX 140, or approved equal) shall be installed at the bottom of the Class 2 base and the concrete flush curb. 6" wide x 16" deep reinforced concrete flush curb. See Engineering Standard 4020 for items not shown or noted. GENERAL NOTES: A.For items not shown or noted, refer to Chapter 1000 of the Caltrans Highway Design Manual, the California MUTCD, and the City of San Luis Obispo 2013 Bicycle Transportation Plan. 6'6' 18" WIDE SHOULDER 12'PATH CENTERLINEEDGE OF ACEDGE OF SHOULDER6" WIDE CURB REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 1 3 2 5 6 May 2018 THE FOLLOWING IS AN EXAMPLE USING AN R-VALUE OF 5: 3" min. A.C. Pavement Base Aggregate, Class 2 Sub-Base, Class 3 STREET SECTION THICKNESS IN INCHES EXISTING BUILDINGS UNPHASED CONST.PHASED CONSTRUCTION 6.5 5.5 7.0 3" 4" 7" 5" 7" 9" 8" 10" 4"7" 5" 7" 9" 8" 10" 3"7" 5" 7" 9" 8" 10" AC BASE SUBBASE AC BASE SUBBASE AC BASE SUBBASEFINISH 6"9.5 11"12"11"11"12"12" 10"5"8.5 11"10"11"11"10" GENERAL NOTES: A.Total thickness of cover depends on R-value of basement soil as well as the Traffic Index assigned to the street. All street sections shall be designed according to the Cal Trans method which is outlined in Chapter 600 of the Cal Trans Highway Design Manual. B.Pavement design shall be based on the traffic indexes shown below, which are based on a 20-year design life for reconstruction or resurfaced streets, and a 50-year design life for new streets. C.For paving in new subdivisions that is placed prior to construction of buildings, the pavement will be subjected to traffic and wear associated with the on-site construction. In order to accommodate this additional usage, the A.C. thickness shall be increased from that which is derived from Cal Trans method by either: a.12" if total section is placed prior to building construction (unphased). b.1" if pavement construction is phased. The pavement section for street widening shall be based on the T.I. of a reconstructed street, and the thickness of the new A.C. shall at a minimum match the thickness of the existing A.C. New streets and road widening where asphalt surface is increased 10 feet or more shall be fog sealed no more than 60 days prior to request for final acceptance by the City. New streets shall be fog sealed the entire length and width of asphalt surface. Road widening shall be fog sealed to the centerline of the widened roadway for the entire widened length, at a minimum. Variation of these design standards may be approved by the City Engineer to meet individual circumstances. A street shall be designed as a new street when existing utilities have been constructed within the past 5 years. *Adopted by Resolution No. 9006 312" 312" 312"412" 412"512" 512" 212" 112" 112" 112" 112" 112" 612" FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT ELEMENTS 7110 Prime coat/fog seal revision JDL MH 12-12 Revise 95% compaction depth DVB BL 10-06 Class 2 base KH MH 01-18 STREET CLASSIFICATION NEW LOCAL RECONSTRUCTED LOCAL LOCAL W/ BUS ROUTES NEW COLLECTOR/ ARTERIAL RECONSTRUCTED COLLECTOR/ARTERIAL T.I.* Basement Soil 95% Compaction Limit 2.5' Thickness of cover 4" min. 6" Base, Class 2 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 SECTION SIDE VIEW OF END ASPHALT BERM 6" 7120 New Border JDL WAP 9-97 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-13 Type "3" to Type "B"JDL WAP 7-98 6" 11" 5"3" 6" TYPE "B" ASPHALT CONCRETE R=1", TYPICAL BOTH SIDES 0.024 TON PER FOOT REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 METAL SIGN POST PARKING METER POST POST-TOP BRACKETS SIDE-MOUNT BRACKET METAL SIGN & PARKING METER POSTS 7210 Galvanized Sleeve Specs.SR JDW 10-03 Sleeve depth; Drafting edits JDL MH 9-12 Revise Note 6 DVB BL 11-0810' min. street name signs7' - Urban5' - rural21"3"4 INSTALLATION NOTES: 2" O.D. galvanized steel pipe Drain hole, 14" diameter, on one side only #4 rebar, 2" long, welded to pipe 10" from bottom 15" standard setback, 22" if sign is more than 15" wide or if post is in Mission Tile sidewalk 2" galvanized metal post, FHWA (Breakaway) approved such as 14g, Qwik-Punch or equal. Posts shall be industrial powder-coated only under the following conditions: - Downtown, no street name sign located at post: Forest Green RAL 6009 or equal - Downtown, street name sign located at post: Brown RAL 8024 or equal - Railroad District: Red-Brown RAL 8016 or equal Heavy duty galvanized steel sleeve such as Pacific Products or approved equal ·Steel: ASTM A500 Grade B; Galvanizing: ASTM 123 ·212" x 212" x 24" one-piece anchor with pointed end, 316" minimum wall thickness ·716" holes, all 4 sides at 1" below top. No holes are allowed in the underground portion of sleeve ·Attach sign post to sleeve with a 38" drive rivet with a 1" washer, or approved equal Brackets: 2" square, 12" length, post top mounted sign bracket, bolted to post and sign with vandal proof bolts. Safeway Sign style 812 or approved equal Side mounting bracket: Standoff bracket Safeway Sign style 1010 or approved equal When sign or parking meter is to be located in sidewalk, see Engineering Standard 7410 for "clear zone" restrictions. 7 5 5 6 Sand backfill 12" 6 5 Class 3 PCC 12"21"3"3'6"2 1 2 1"12"12" 1 3 4 Sand backfill Class 3 PCC 3 118"12"12" 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 POST-TOP BRACKETS SIDE-MOUNT BRACKET 10' min. street name signs7' - Urban5' - rural14" MIN.3"1 INSTALLATION NOTES: 15" standard setback, 22" if sign is more than 15" wide or if post is in Mission Style sidewalk. 2" galvanized metal post, FHWA (Breakaway) approved such as 14g, Qwik-Punch or equal. Posts shall be industrial powder-coated only under the following conditions: - Downtown, no street name sign located at post: Forest Green RAL 6009 or equal. - Downtown, street name sign located at post: Brown RAL 8024 or equal. - Railroad District: Red-Brown RAL 8016 or equal. Heavy duty galvanized steel sleeve such as Pacific Products or approved equal. ·Steel: ASTM A500 Grade B; Galvanizing: ASTM 123 ·212" x 212" x 24" one-piece anchor with pointed end, 316" minimum wall thickness ·716" holes, all 4 sides at 1" below top. No holes are allowed in the underground portion of sleeve. ·Attach sign post to sleeve with a 38" drive rivet with a 1" washer, or approved equal. Brackets: 2" square, 12" length, post top mounted sign bracket, bolted to post and sign with vandal proof bolts. Safeway Sign style 812 or approved equal. Side mounting bracket: Standoff bracket Safeway Sign style 1010 or approved equal. Cored or chipped hole. Minimize size to install sleeve. Finish - Smooth, paste worked into joint to blend. Mission - Colored and lightly salted. Standard may be used where City Engineer authorizes retrofit, in lieu of full panel removal & restoration per Eng. Std. 7210. When sign or parking meter is to be located in sidewalk, see Engineering Standard 7410 for "clear zone" restrictions. 4 2 2 3 1 2 4 5 6 5 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: METAL SIGN POST ON EXISTING SIDEWALK 3 6 Drive sleeve or dig out and concrete backfill METAL SIGN & PARKING METER POSTS (IN EXISTING SIDEWALK) 7215 New Standard SR BL 5-14 May 2018 1000St A B C D E F H W R NA 18" 2"1" 8" 2" 30" - 100" max.30" - 100" max. Center name in frame 3" None 2" - 3" 8"4" G NA 3" Higuera W H A B D G D C (min.)C (min.) F E E R C (min.) 38" 38" 12" 12" STREET NAME SIGN 7250 Modified Table MH BL 1-09 Revised Notes MH BL 10-09 Added Note 11 MH JDW 10-04 NOTES: 1.Signs are single blade aluminum - 5052 H38 0.125 double-faced. 2.Mast Arm signs display street name only, one sign per travel direction. 3.Color: 3M-887I Brown background, reflective white letters and arrow. All non-internally illuminated signs to be prepared with reverse screening. Reflective white lettering shall be 700-candle power, "VIP" sheeting. All pole mounted signs shall have anti-graffiti clear coating. (Avery AL 1000 or approved equal). Street name signs for private roadways shall reverse colors, white background and brown lettering. 4.Font: Libra (letter height = tall letters / short letters) 5.Arrow on pole mount signs points in the direction that addresses increase. 6.Mounting: See Engineering Standard 7210 for mounting on poles. See Caltrans Standards ES 70 and ES 7D for mast arm mounting. 7.Sign width "W" to be 30" min. and increased as required in 6" increments to 100" max. 8."C" is measured to top and/or bottom of tall letters. 9.Mast arm signs are additive to pole mount signs at signalized locations. 10.One set of pole mounts per intersection except two in central business district when no signal present. 11."st", block number and arrow are deleted for mast arm mounted signs. DIMENSIONS SIGNALIZED WITH MAST ARM MOUNTS POLE MOUNTS CENTER OVER NUMBER AND ARROW REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 A A DEPTH OF A.C. BUMP (TYPE 1) 00 0246420 GUTTER SECTION A-A PROFILE 30" 134 212 134212 ROAD BUMP CONSTRUCTION DETAILS 7320 Drafting edits JDL MH 4-13 Metric conversion SR WAP 12-96 Add Type 2 SR WAP 12-96 GENERAL NOTES: A.Bumps shall be placed on good, sound asphalt surface. Structural section shall be repaired or replaced, as needed, prior to placing bump. B.A tack coat shall be applied prior to placing the bump paving. C.Bump shall be constructed of asphalt concrete, Type "B", with 38" maximum aggregate. D.For location, striping, and signs, see Engineering Standard 7321. E.Bump type shall be determined by the City Engineer. ℄ Distance from Edge (ft) Depth of A.C. (in)3 DEPTH OF A.C. BUMP (TYPE 2) 00 0246420 138138238 A.C. BUMP 238 Distance from Edge (ft) 212 Depth of A.C. (in) (E) A.C. PAVEMENT 6'6' REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 INSTALLATION NOTES: 12" wide reflective white thermoplastic pavement markings. "ROAD BUMPS AHEAD" signs shall be located only as directed by the City Engineer. For sign post details, see Engineering Standard 7210. Signs shall conform to State Specifications. To be determined in field. One sign shall be installed in advance of a series of bumps. Sign to be posted at the road bump but may be posted up to 50' in advance as directed by the City Engineer. Where no curb and gutter exist, add AC berm per Engineering Standard 7120 for the length of the table. STRIPING & SIGNS CURB FACE SIDEWALK GUTTER LOCATION ROAD BUMP LOCATION, STRIPING & SIGNS 7321 Drafting edits JDL MH 4-13 Revised Note 3, added Note 7 DVB BL 11-06 Striping revision SR WAP 12-96 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 43 100' min. 15' min. 20' min. 10' min. utility cover drain inletdriveway crosswalk fire hydrant flow ℄ ℄ ℄ 5 8'12" 12"BUMP ROAD BUMPS AHEAD W37 6 ℄℄ 2 3 4 1 12'W37 6 5 8' 7 10' 24" 24" 24" 30" x 30" Black on Yellow 5" Series D Letters High Intensity Reflectorized W37 30" x 30" Black on Yellow 6" Series E Letters High Intensity Reflectorized REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 INSTALLATION NOTES: For General Construction Notes, see Engineering Standard 7320. 12" wide reflective white thermoplastic pavement markings. "ROAD BUMPS AHEAD" signs shall be located only as directed by the City Engineer. For sign post details, see Engineering Standard 7210. Signs shall conform to State Specifications or as approved by the City Traffic Engineer. To be determined in field. One sign shall be installed in advance of a series of bumps. Additional 12" wide reflective thermoplastic pavement markings may be installed as directed by the City Traffic Engineer. Where no curb and gutter exist, add AC berm per Engineering Standard 7120 for the length of the table. Exceptions may be approved by the City Traffic Engineer. STRIPING & SIGNS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LOCATION 30" x 30" Black on Yellow 5" Series D Letters High Intensity Reflectorized Flat Section A Section C Section B SPEED TABLE LOCATION, STRIPING & SIGNS 7325 New Standard CO TB 10-06 Note 9; DW clearance DVB BL 11-06 Drafting edtis JDL MH 5-13 ROAD BUMPS AHEAD 2 3 4 ℄℄ 8' 5 6'10' BUMP 6' 5 8' W8-1 30" x 30" Black on Yellow 6" Series E Letters High Intensity Reflectorized 16 1 6 6' 12" 24" 43 7 ℄℄ driveway drain inlet flow utility cover ℄ fire hydrant 15' min. 20' min. CURB FACE SIDEWALK GUTTER 10' min. 8 A A BB C C 6'10'6' Parabolic Parabolic 8 Parabolic Section Curb Face Cross slope of new speed table to match existing road 2.0' Width Varies 1.0' Taper Curb Detail 6'0.25'0.24'0.22'0.19'0.14'0.08'1'1'1'1'1'1' REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 4' 12" 6" 18" dia. 3" 3' 12" 24" 8' O.C. max. 4' 24" max. GENERAL NOTES: A.All lumber shall be Douglas Fir, surfaced four sides (DFS4S). B.All lumber shall be painted white as per Caltrans specifications. C.Treat portion of post below ground as per Caltrans specifications. D.YELLOW 'N' marker is used to warn of an abrupt turn. Background shall be high intensity yellow retro-reflective sheeting. Alternate 'N' marker with W56 (double head arrow) or W57 (single head arrow), one per section. E.RED 'N' marker is used to mark the end of a street. Background shall be high intensity red retro-reflective sheeting. Alternate 'N' marker with W31, one per section. F.Total length required varies dependent upon street width. STREET BARRICADE 7330 New Border JDL WAP 1-98 Drafting edits JDL MH 5-13 Revised Notes MH JDW 10-04 6" x 6" Post 2" x 6" StringerCurb Face or Edge of Pavement38" dia. x 5" Lag Bolt and Plain Washer, typ. W31, W56 or W57 See Note D. PC Concrete Collar "N" Marker 2" Red Reflector at each end REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 ALTERNATE NO. 1 ALTERNATE NO. 2SECTION A-A AA REMOVABLE BOLLARD 7335 Drafting edits JDL MH 5-13 Revised Note 3 Alternate 1 MH BL 12-09 Revised Notes 2 & 6 MH BL 11-09 GENERAL NOTES: A.Provide Knox-box padlocks per City Fire Department. B.Provide 5' clear spacing between bollards (5'-3" O.C.) for bicycling facilities. For all other installations, provide 4' clear spacing between bollards (4'-3" O.C.) C.Use play booster by Landscape Structures Inc. distributed by Rec West (818) 735-3838, South Bay Foundry DFB-RA5 or approved equal. D.Engineers and architects are encouraged to submit alternate designs that are consistent with these design features, and the projects where the bollards are to be used. E.Yellow reflective tape shall be placed on each face of bollard as directed by Engineer. F.For bicycling facilities, provide pathway striping that conforms to CA MUTCD.18"36"12"6"5" Ø Aluminum removable Bollard (see Note C), white powder coated Reflective Striping, yellow Weld on or Clamp Loop, anchor chain in concrete for padlock 14" Galvanized Chain Form Sleeve in concrete Class 3 Concrete Footing, 16" x 16" flush with finish grade 2" Ø Drain Hole Gravel Sump 8" Ø x 24" deep Routed recesses, show carving marks 10" x 10" x 36" RWD resawn "A" grade, clear #1 or better redwood. See elevation 9/16"typ.1" typ.Varies45° typ.1 3/4"typ.1" typ.NOTE: All steel to be double coated galvanized. 7" Finish Wood per Specifications and as directed by Engineer 3" Ø Pipe to be friction fit in post Provide latch or Chain 6"36"3"min.3"316" x 6" sq. flush Steel Plate, adjust for slope of ramp and weld to 3" pipe, attached to base of post with (4) wood screws, recess screw heads into plate.12" Ø Cl. 3 PCC Gravel Sump, 8" Ø x 24" deep 2" Ø Drain Hole3"12"REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 PEDESTRIANS PROHIBITED BARRICADE SIDEWALK CLOSURE 7340 Drafting edits JDL MH 5-13 Add lumber size notes JDL JDW 5-02 Add Note G JDL JDW 5-02 GENERAL NOTES: A.Barricade construction shall be per CALTRANS STANDARD PLAN A-73C, "Type III Barricade", except as herein modified. B.Caltrans Type III Barricade may be used unmodified (except for addition of signs) with special approval of the City Engineer. C.Barricade(s) shall be placed at each end of sidewalk closure and at all other pedestrian access points. If one barricade is not wide enough to block access, additional barricades shall be used to the satisfaction of the City Engineer. D.Signs shall conform to the requirements of the California Traffic Control Devices Committee and shall be fastened to rails with bolts, nuts and washers. E.Rails shall be fastened to vertical posts with lag bolts and washers as shown. F.Additional or alternate signage may be required depending on situation. G.Entire barricade shall be painted with two coats of exterior white latex paint prior to installation of reflective bands. R43, 12" x 24" R96, 18" x 18" 2" x Blocking, typ. 1" x 8" Rails, S4S, typ. 2" x 4" 2" x 4"2" x 4" 5' 2" x 6" 4' 12" REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 GENERAL NOTES: A.Hi-Vis Crosswalks shall include two 12" wide white or yellow boundary markings and 24" wide ladder markings equally spaced on and between vehicular travel lanes. Ladder markings shall be installed parallel to the direction of vehicular traffic. Where Hi-Vis Crosswalks are placed on local roads or streets that contain no traffic control striping, the ladder markings shall be equally spaced at 5' on center across the width of the traveled way. B.Where new installations are made, signs as required in the City's Crosswalk Policy shall also be installed. HI-VIS CROSSWALKS 7350 New Standard MH BL 11-05 Rev. Ladder width to 24"DVB BL 10-06 Ladder Marking note JDL MH 9-12 24" White or Yellow Ladder Markings 12" White or Yellow Boundary Markings REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 7' min.8' max.CrosswalkDriveway or Handicapped Ramp 10' min.5' max.12'5' max.15' min. 2 2 10' min. 2 24" Parking Meter Fire Hydrant Back of Sidewalk Curb Face CLEARANCES BCRBCRSPACE LENGTH TRAFFICTEE MOTORCYCLE SPACES SIGN STREET PARKING 7410 New Border JDL WAP 1-98 Metric Conversion SR WAP 12-96 Drafting edits JDL MH 5-13 MOTOR CYCLE PARKING ONLY INSTALLATION NOTES: CLEAR ZONE: Area which shall not contain tree well, sign, bike rack, trash receptacle, mail box, street light, or other obstruction to automobile doors or driver/passenger access. These clearances apply at both ends of space. All other clearance requirements shall be the same as for automobiles. 4" White Traffic Paint Minimum of two spaces, maximum of six spaces. 1 2 3 4 5 12" x 20" 3" Series B Black on White 5 4"12"24" 4 30" Parking Meters with Signs Curb Face 7' min.8' max.4' 3 4 2' 3 4' - 6"30" 15' min.18' - 22'22'22'18' - 22'15' min. Clear Zone 1 Curb Face Back of Sidewalk 5'REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 2" 24" FG GENERAL NOTES: UPS Unit shall be current ande generation MYERS POWERBACK 2000 system with single meter, (MEUG35-PB-SL and PBM-2000), or approved equal with one (1) Photoelectric cell window as follows: Breakers on Metered Side Features in addition to Standard Features Single Pole 50 amp - Signals 2000VA Output Power Single Pole 20 amp - ILSNS 4 x 65Ah Batteries Single Pole 15 amp - Controls 12 Gauge Stainless Steel Cabinet 1 x 20 amp - Spare PE Cell Test Switch, Lighting Relay 1 x 20 amp - Video Equipment 1500 Watts total power required Generator Kit Breakers on Unmetered Side 2 Pole 30 amp - Street Lights INSTALLATION NOTES: Stainless Steel UPS / Service Meter Panel Batteries (4) - 18" x 58" Ø Galvanized Anchor Bolts with 4" 90° Bend (E) Sidewalk or (N) 4" thick Class 3 PCC Pad, 3' x 3' at the front of the enclosure Class 3 Concrete Footing Ground Rod 4" Class 2 Aggregate Base Service, Lighting and Controller Conduits 6" typ.FRONTSERVICE and UPS COMBINED ENCLOSURE 7510 Revise General Notes SR BL 1-14 Revise General Note A DVB BL 12-07 Drafting edits JDL MH 5-13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 9 7 6 5 8 FG 6"6" 1 8 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 INSTALLATION NOTES: PG&E point of service 2-inch conduit with bell end PG&E Connection Box: PG&E #2 box (17" x 30" x 26") marked "PG&E" Light: See Engineering Standards 7905, 7910 and 7915. Attach ground conductor to pole grounding lug with a 316" or larger brass bolt. City point of service: #3½ concrete pull box marked "STREET LIGHT" Ground rod and clamp #3½ concrete luminaire pull box marked "STREET LIGHT" 2-amp fuse in advance of light 10-amp fuse in advance of lights (4 lights max. per 30-amp fuse) GENERAL NOTES: A.Fuses shall be Bussmann HEB-LW-RLA or approved equal with insulating boots. Fuse holder must be installed correctly to match field wiring for line side and load side. B.Ground rods shall be Dottie GR5808, Calpico #CP588, Eritech #615880 or approved equal. C.Ground rod clamp shall be a brass acorn type clamp, Dottie GR58, Blackburn #JAB 1/2 H, Joslyn #J8591H or approved equal. D.Pull boxes shall be placed in sidewalk areas unless otherwise approved by the Engineer in writing. E.Where the light location is more than 15' from the PG&E point of service, an additional #3½ pull box will be required at a location identified by the Engineer. An additional fuse is not required in this additional box. F.Use 10 gauge solid copper conductors with THWN solid black and solid white insulation color. LIGHTING CIRCUIT 7520 Revise Notes BL MH 1-14 Revise Notes MH BL 11-09 Various Note revisions; Draft. editsJDL MH 4-13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15' max. See General Note E 5' max.10' max. PG&E P.O.S. PG&E Connection City P.O.S. 5' max.1 3 2 typ. 5 6 8 4 2 typ. See General Note E PG&E P.O.S. PG&E Connection 5' max.1 3 2 typ. 7 8 Maximum Distance is 1 block or 1,000' (whichever is less) 7 8 4 2 typ. SINGLE LIGHT INSTALLATION SERIES LIGHTING INSTALLATION City P.O.S. 965 Series Lighting REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 2' from edge of path 24" Ø Lighting Pull Box lid flush with grade for finished surfaces, 1" above grade in other areas, at each post light. See Engineering Standard 7520. 9 5 10 321 4 18' 16'± 36" Foundation or direct burial PATH LIGHTING 7905 Design / text SR BL 1-14 Fixture Model; Drafting edits JDL MH 5-13 Drafting edits JDL MH 2-14 FG REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO: LUMINAIRE: LUMINIS SR135-L1W30r1-R2/APA-PAA518 POLE: LUMINIS PAA518-BKT (Confirm with City the latest luminaire and pole model no. before ordering) COLOR: Jet Black Marine grade powder coat (BKT). INSTALLATION NOTES: HOUSING/SHADE: Cast aluminum housing and shade. Corrosion resistant 356 aluminum alloy with 0.1% CU content. LED: (SR135-L1W30r1-R2) Light-emitting Diode, 4000K, 34W input watts, minimum 4170 delivered lumens, IES Type II distribution, full cut off. POWER SUPPLY/DRIVER: (120-277) multi-volt power supply. Verify system voltage before ordering. POLE MOUNT: (APA) 158" Ø shepherd arm aluminum side pole mount. POLE: (PAA518) Luminis 5" diameter x min .125 wall. 6061-T6 aluminum alloy, 18' height, rated for min. 80 MPH wind load with reinforced cast base plate and cast aluminum base cover. Provide end cap. ANCHOR BOLTS: Galvanized steel, 34" Ø x 30" with 4" leg, (4) total with galvanized nuts and washers (8) total. PCC FOUNDATION: Class 3 concrete PULL BOX: See Engineering Standard 7520. CONDUIT: 2" min. Install City furnished light number plaque. GENERAL NOTES: A.Verify lighting system voltage before ordering. B.Luminaire and post shall be from same manufacturer. C.Include photo cell on each pole unless controlled by a remote photocell or as noted otherwise on plans. D.Install light/pole per manufacturer's directions and Section 86 of the Standard Specifications. E.Conductors, conduit, ground rod, and circuitry must comply with Engineering Standard 7520. 8 Pack grout in gap between base plate and foundation after plumbing the fixture. Allow drainage from inside pole. 7 6 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 May 2018 4" (typ) < or = 100' > 100' > 100' < or = 100' TWO WAY STREET ONE WAY STREET GENERAL NOTES: A.Reflectors shall be 2-way blue reflective markers and shall conform to the standards set forth for reflective markers by the State of California Department of Transportation. B.Reflectors shall be set on the hydrant side of the adjacent traffic stripe. Where no stripes exist, reflector should be placed in the center of the pavement. C.When hydrants are within 100' of an intersection, a marker shall be placed on the cross street as well. D.Reflectors shall be set behind the pedestrian crossing area at an intersection. E.Reflectors shall be cemented to the pavement in accordance with the requirements of Section 85, "PAVEMENT MARKERS" of the State of California Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. HYDRANT REFLECTOR 7920 Drafting edits JDL MH 5-13 Reflector locations MH JDW 10-04 Revise Note C MH JDW 10-04 SYMBOLS: Reflector Hydrant REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 PROFILE 21" - 26" 39" 6" 4.25" 1" 30" Spacing 7' Center to Center for multiple In-line Racks 20" to Face of Curb SQUARE BASE PLATE 18" A SECTION A-A 45° BICYCLE RACK 7930 Spacing, Tamper-resistant anchorsJDL MH 4-13 Modified Note C MH BL 12-09 Added Notes D and E DVB BL 11-08 GENERAL NOTES: A.Entire rack and base plate assembly shall be industrial high gloss powder-coated. Color: Dark Forest Green in Downtown area (match City Standard), black elsewhere. B.Manufactured unit may be used in lieu of fabricated rack, Viper 100 or South Bay Foundry DBL300-2239. C.Alternate rack style may be approved by the City Engineer. Peak Racks are an approved rack style (see Community Design Guidelines for further information.) D.Side by side racks shall have a minimum spacing of 3' between racks. Refer to the Community Design Guidelines for additional information regarding placement and spacing. E.When inverted "U" racks are orientated parallel to a wall, there shall be a 24" minimum clearance to the wall. When orientated perpendicular to a wall, there shall be a minumum of 36" between the wall face and the center of rack. A Center of Pipe ends in Base Plate 14" Thick Plate 1" Ø Hole, typ. 18" R = 4" 2" White Reflective Tape wrapped around Pipe, typ. of 3 2" Ø Steel Pipe, 116" Thick, min. Base Plate, 18" Thick, typ. 38" Ø Tamper Resistant Anchor, 238" long, typ. (4) each Plate REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STREET TREES MASTER LIST Page 1 of 2 8010 Revised List JDL MH 6-13 List update KH MH 1-18 List update BL JDW 1-12 STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: May 2018 ALLOWABLE ZONES CHARACTERISTICS 1 - In parkway or tree well C = Fall Color D = Deciduous 2 - 3 to 7.5 feet from curb (or sidewalk if present) F = Flowering G = Suggested trees for Commemorative Grove 3 - 7.5 to 10 feet from the curb (or sidewalk if present) E = Evergreen BOTANICAL NAME COMMON NAME CHARACTERISTICS HEIGHT WIDTH ZONE Ilex opaca American Holly E 50 40 2-3 Brachychiton acerifolius Australian Flame tree E F 60 30 3 Geijera parviflora Australian Willow E 30 20 1-3 Lophostemon confertus Brisbane Box E F 45 25 3 Eriobotrya deflexa Bronze loquat E F 15 10 1-3 Melaleuca quinquenervia Cajeput tree E F 40 25 2-3 Platanus racemosa California Sycamore D G 80 50 3 Cinnamomum camphora Camphor Tree E 50 60 3 Pinus canariensis Canary Island Pine E 80 35 3 Calodendrum capense Cape Chestnut D F 40 40 3 Lyonothamnus floribundus Catalina Ironwood E 35 15 1-3 Ulmus parvifolia Chinese Evergreen Elm E 60 60 2-3 Koelreuteria bipinnata Chinese Flame Tree E C F 30 30 2 Chionanthus retusus Chinese Fringe Tree D C F 20 20 1-3 Pistacia chinensis Chinese Pistache D C G 60 40 2-3 Quercus agrifolia Coast Live Oak E G 70 70 3 Eucalyptus torquata Coral Gum E F 36 30 1-3 Quercus suber Cork Oak E G 60 60 3 Metasequoia glyptostroboides Dawn Redwood D 90 20 3 Cedrus deodara Deodar Cedar E G 80 40 3 Cercis canadensis Eastern Redbud D C F 35 35 1 Fagus sylvatica European Beech D 70 40 3 Stenocarpus sinuatus Firewheel Tree E F 30 15 1-3 Melaleuca linariifolia Flaxleaf Paperbark E F 30 25 2-3 Ceiba speciosa Floss Silk Tree Semi-E F 50 40 2-3 Cassia leptophylla Gold Medallion Tree Semi-E F 30 20 1-2 Koelreuteria paniculata Goldenrain Tree D F G 35 40 2-3 Brahea edulis Guadalupe Island Palm E F 30 10 1 Quercus ilex Holly Oak E 60 60 3 Ficus microcarpa Indian Laurel Fig E 60 70 3 Quercus tomentella Island Oak E 30 30 3 Jacaranda mimosifolia Jacaranda D F 40 30 2-3 Lagerstroemia faurei Japanese Crape Myrtle D C F 30 30 1-3 Harpephyllum caffrum Kaffir Plum E 25 15 1-2 Magnolia grandiflora 'Little Gem' Little Gem Magnolia E F 25 15 1-3 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STREET TREES MASTER LIST Page 2 of 2 8010 Revised List JDL MH 6-13 List update KH MH 1-18 List update BL JDW 1-12 STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: May 2018 Platanus x hispanica London Plane Tree D 80 40 2-3 Ginkgo biloba Maidenhair Tree D C 50 30 1-3 Maytenus boaria Mayten Tree E 50 20 1-3 Hesperocyparis macrocarpa Monterey cypress E 55 60 3 Metrosideros excelsus New Zealand Christmas Tree E F 30 30 1-3 Agonis flexousa Peppermint Willow E F 40 30 1-2 Quercus palustris Pin Oak D C 60 60 3 Melaleuca styphelioides Prickly-leaved Paperbark E F 70 40 3 Lagunaria patersonia Primrose Tree E C F 50 30 2-3 Bauhinia variegata Purple Orchid Tree D F 35 35 2-3 Corymbia ficifolia Red Flowering Gum E F 40 40 2-3 Aesculus x carnea Red Horse Chestnut D F 40 30 2-3 Acer rubrum Red Maple D C 60 40 1-3 Quercus rubra (Q. coccinea) Red Oak D C 60 60 3 Betula nigra River Birch D 90 60 3 Zelkova serrata Sawleaf Elm D C 60 60 2-3 Acacia stenophylla Shoestring Acacia E F 30 20 1 Albizia julibrissin Silk tree D F 40 40 2-3 Quercus virginiana Southern Live Oak E 60 60 3 Magnolia grandiflora Southern Magnolia E F 80 60 3 Arbutus 'Marina' Strawberry Tree E F G 40 40 1-3 Michelia doltsopa Sweet Michelia E F 30 25 1-2 Hymenosporum flavum Sweetshade E F 40 20 1-2 Gleditsia triacanthos 'Inermis' Thornless Honey Locust D C 70 35 1-3 Tipuana tipu Tipu Tree D C F 40 50 2-3 Heteromeles arbutifolia Toyon E F 25 25 1-3 Liriodendron tulipifera Tulip Tree D C F 70 40 3 Quercus lobata Valley Oak D C 70 70 3 Pittosporum undulatum Victorian Box E F 40 40 2-3 Crataegus phaenopyrum Washington Hawthorn D C F 25 20 1-3 Tristaniopsis laurina Water Gum E F 45 25 2-3 Callistemon viminalis Weeping Bottlebrush E F 30 20 1-2 Cercis occidentalis Western Redbud D C F 18 18 1-3 Trees not included on this list may be used only with prior approval by the City Arborist. REVISIONS BY APP DATE STREET TREES MAJOR STREETS 8020 Revised List KH MH 1-18 Revise List BL BL 11-06 New Border JDL WAP 1-98 STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: May 2018 Note: Percentages refer to mixture of tree types in project area DOWNTOWN DISTRICT % Ficus microcarpa 10 Quercus ilex 20 Quercus rubra (Q. coccinea) 30 Gingko biloba 'Fairmont' 30 Olea europaea 'Swan Hill'-grafted fruitless 10 Downtown Accent Trees Jacaranda mimosifolia Magnolia grandiflora 'Little Gem' Corymbia ficifolia Cassia leptophylla Metrosideros excelsa Lagerstroemia hybrid* BROAD STREET % Monterey St. to Pacific St. Lophostemon confertus 60 Gingko biloba 'Fairmont' 40 Pacific St. to High St. Platanus x hispanica 40 Pistacia chinensis 40 Ginkgo biloba 'Fairmont' 20 High St. to City Limits Platanus x hispanica 30 Quercus palustris 20 Pistacia chinensis* 20 Quercus rubra (Q. coccinea) 15 Lophostemon confertus 15 *Substitute-south of Orcutt At creek crossings Platanus x hispanica 100 CALIFORNIABLVD. % Cal Poly to Mill St. Koelreutaria bipinnata 25 Quercus rubra (Q. coccinea) 25 Cinnamomum camphora 30 Ulmus parvifolia 20 Mill St. to San Luis Dr. Ulmus parvifolia 30 Metrosideros excelsus 40 Lophostemon confertus 30 San Luis Dr. to Johnson Ave. Quercus agrifolia 60 Ulmus parvifolia 40 At creek crossings Platanus x hispanica 100 FOOTHILL BLVD. % Magnolia "Majestic Beauty" 30 Koelreutaria bipinnata 30 Platanus x hispanica 40 At creek crossings Platanus x hispanica 100 GRAND AVENUE % Magnolia 'Majestic Beauty' 50 Platanus x hispanica 50 HIGUERA STREET (east end) % California Blvd. to Santa Rosa St. Use Downtown Accent Trees HIGUERA STREET (Downtown) % Santa Rosa St. to Nipomo St. Use Downtown District HIGUERA STREET (west end) % Nipomo St. to Madonna Rd. Use Downtown Accent Trees Madonna Rd. to City Limit Pinus canariensis 30 Hesperocyparis macrocarpa 30 Hymenosporum flavum 20 Quercus (Red Oak subgenus)1 20 JOHNSON AVENUE % Hwy. 101 to SPRR underpass Magnolia 'Majestic Beauty' 20 Pistacia chinensis 30 Quercus palustris 30 Hymenosporum flavum 20 UPRR underpass to Laurel Lane Quercus agrifolia 20 Pistacia chinensis 20 Ulmus parvifolia 20 Hymenosporum flavum 20 Quercus rubra (Q. coccinea) 20 Laurel Lane to Orcutt Rd. Koelreutaria bipinnata 20 Quercus rubra (Q. coccinea) 20 Ulmus parvifolia 20 Jacaranda mimosifolia 20 Hymenosporum flavum 20 LAUREL LANE % Platanus x hispanica 50 Quercus suber 20 Jacaranda mimosifolia 15 Gingko biloba 15 LOS OSOS VALLEYROAD % Lophostemon confertus 20 Quercus tomentella 20 Fagus sylvatica 20 Quercus agrifolia 20 Pinus caneriensis 20 MADONNA ROAD % Pinus canariensis 25 Pistacia chinensis 25 Quercus agrifolia 25 Quercus rubra (Q. coccinea) 25 MARSH STREET % Use Downtown District MARGARITA AVENUE % Platanus x hispanica 30 Hymenosporum flavum 30 Quercus palustris 40 MONTEREY STREET % Use Downtown District ORCUTTROAD % Pistachia chinensis 60 Lophostemon confertus 20 Quercus agrifolia 20 At creek crossings Platanus x hispanica 100 PRADO ROAD % Platanus x hispanica 40 Pinus canariensis 30 Quercus palustris 30 SANTA ROSA STREET % Highland St. to Murray St. Quercus agrifolia 80 Pistacia chinensis 20 Murray St. to Marsh St. Pistacia chinensis 30 Koelreutaria bipinnata 20 Ficus microcarpa 10 Lophostemon confertus 30 Jacaranda mimosifolia 10 At Creek intersections Platanus x hispanica 100 SOUTH STREET % Tristaniopsis laurina 20 Jacaranda mimosifolia 20 Ginkgo biloba 'Fairmont' 20 Platanus x hispanica 20 Quercus palustris 20 TANKFARM ROAD % East of Broad St. Platanus x hispanica 50 Lophostemon confertus 20 Eucalyptus torquata 30 West of Broad St. Platanus x hispanica 25 Cinnamomum camphora 25 Quercus agrifolia 25 Quercus rubra (Q. coccinea) 25 SECTION A-A SECTION B-B Curb facePLAN GENERAL NOTES: A.See Engineering Standard 8130 for General Notes. INSTALLATION NOTES: See Engineering Standard 8130 for Tree Grate and Frame Size Chart . Construct sidewalk per Engineering Standard 4150. A A B B 2 Curb Face W 6" 6" 6" TREE WELL RAILROAD DISTRICT 8135 New Standard JDL DA 3-17 1 W L1 2 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: 6" 1 DRAIN TO TREE WELL #4 REBAR HOOP SCORE MARK AT EACH CORNER May 2018 Tree SECTION PLAN *This method to be used only when the root growth of an existing tree will not allow the use of a standard grate and sidewalk does not need repair. Must be approved by the City Engineer. 1 4' - 6" INSTALLATION NOTES: Sawcut and remove existing tree well base ring and sidewalk to dimension shown. Backfill well with native material to within 5" to 6" of sidewalk surface. Place 3" to 4" of granite chips (or 14" - 12" aggregate rock). Cover with red brick. Final surface to be level and flush with sidewalk. TREE WELL COVER ALTERNATE METHOD* 8150 Drafting edits JDL MH 5-13 Revised * Note MH BL 11-09 Revised Note 4 DVB BL 11-065' - 0"Curb Face 3 Curb Face 5 2 4 3 2 1 4 5 Varies VariesREVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 STREET TREE PLANTING NOTES 8210 Revised Notes A, D, & G MH BL 11-09 Modified A, B, C, D KH MH 1-18 Drafting edits JDL MH 5-13 STREET TREE PLANTING INSTRUCTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS A.INSPECTION: Inspection of tree planting by the City Engineering Inspector or Building Inspector is required. 1.Engineering Inspector or Building Inspector shall approve the hole dimensions prior to planting. 2.City Arborist shall perform inspection of planting and tree quality after the tree planting is complete. Appointments for inspection(s) may be made by calling (805) 781-7220 at least 48 hours in advance of the inspection. B.TREE QUALITY: Tree quality must conform to the requirements of guideline specifications for nursery tree quality included in Appendix I. C.BACKFILL MATERIAL: The backfill material shall be free of construction spoils/debris and composed of: ·75% Native Soil (the soil removed from the planting hole) ·15% Compost Material ·10% Sand (see Note) Note:The sand component of the backfill may be deleted if the Arborist determines that the existing native soil will provide adequate aeration for the root system. D.PLANTING: Partially fill the bottom of the excavated hole with backfill material, while tamping and watering, to an elevation equal to the bottom of the root ball. Root crown (top of root ball) shall extend one (1) inch above finish grade when planting is completed and 4 inches below the bottom of grate. Place the tree to be planted in the center of the hole on tamped backfill. Continue adding backfill while tamping and watering. Continue adding backfill around root ball to finish grade, while tamping tightly, and add additional water to thoroughly wet root ball and backfill material. For Street Tree Well installations, finish grade shall be 4" below the sidewalk grade. E.TREE SIZE and TYPE: Standard tree size shall be #15. A larger sized 24", 36" or 48" box may be required for some installations. New trees planted in the downtown (within the boundary of the Downtown Association) shall be a minimum of a 24" box. Tree type shall be from the Master Street Tree list and (if applicable) be in accordance with the selections for major streets. F.STAKING: All newly planted street trees shall be staked. G.GUARDS: Trees planted within the Mission Style Sidewalk District shall include installation of a tree guard of the same manufacturer as the tree grate, see Engineering Standard 8130. REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 Stake Stake INSTALLATION NOTES: Align face of tree trunk with face of stake. At Zone 1, tree grate shall be installed per Engineering Standard 8130, 4" clear from top of grate to top of backfill material. TREE PLANTING and STAKING ZONES 1, 2 and 3 15 Gallon Size 8220 Combined Stds 8830 and 8840 JDL MH 6-13 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 Remove crossbrace & tubes KH MH 01-16 1 2 Prevailing Wind Direction 1 Tree Trunk 112" Fence Staple, galv. (over, not through) or roofing nail provided with ties. Cinch-Tie 8'-3" Stake Ties shall be inter- locked around tree 30" 18" 3' Backfill Material (See Eng. Std. 8210) 5' 12" 12" 24" 12" Top of stake shall not be taller than lowest tree limb. Trim stake evenly as necessary. 24" Cinch-ties (4 ea.) shall be snug, not tight Remove nursery stake(s) and backfill hole with soil after planting. Install (2) 8'-3" Lodgepole Pine Stakes. Top of Root Ball 12" above finished grade Root Ball Remove clay slick or glazing if dug by power auger Mulch Wood Chips, 2" deep ZONE 1: Trees planted in tree wells or parkway ZONE 2: Trees planted within 7'-6" of curb, sidewalk, or paving ZONE 3: Trees planted more than 7'-6" of curb, sidewalk, or paving 24" 28" min. REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 Stake Stake INSTALLATION NOTES: Align face of tree trunk with face of stake. TREE PLANTING and STAKING ZONES 1 and 2 24" Box and Larger 8250 Removed crossbrace KH MH 01-18 Revised Tube Length MH BL 11-09 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 1 Prevailing Wind Direction 1 Tree Trunk 112" Fence Staple, galv. (over, not through) or roofing nails provided with ties. Cinch-Tie 10'-0" Stake Ties shall be inter- locked around tree E D C B 18" A 12" Top of stake shall not be taller than lowest tree limb. Trim stake as necessary. 24" Cinch-ties (4 ea.) shall be snug, not tight Remove nursery stake(s) and backfill hole remaining after planting. Install (2) 10'-0"Lodgepole Pine Stakes. Roots Remove clay slick or glazing if dug by power auger Backfill Material (See Eng. Std. 8210) 18" A B C D E 24 48 36 24 18 66 72 84 24 36 42 30 24 18 40 48 60 36 TREE BOX SIZE (in) DIMENSIONS (in) 12" ZONE 1: Trees planted in tree wells or parkway ZONE 2: Trees planted within 7'-6" of curb, sidewalk, or paving REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 NOTES: Backfill per Standard Specifications. Fertilizer tablets per Standard Specifications. Place tablet halfway up root ball and approximately 1 inch from root tips, equally spaced around the root ball. Plant pit to have vertical sides. Pit shall be twice the width of root ball or container and one and a half times the height of the root ball or container. Sides and bottom of plant pit are to be scarified to remove shined surfaces. Place plant in pit so that it is plumb and straight with best side facing the most viewed angle. FG X 1/2 X SHRUB PLANTING 8410 New Standard BL JDW 1-04 Revise Note 2; Add Notes 3 and 4JDL BL 5-12 Drafting edits JDL MH 5-13 Y 1/2 Y Set crown 58" above grade. 1 2 3 Root Ball 4 2 1 3 4 #1 and #5 = 2" #15 and larger = 4" REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 .25 X .5 X .5 X GENERAL NOTE: A.Ground cover on center (OC) spacing shall be per plans or Special Provisions by plant type. If not specified, OC spacing shall be 24". Concrete Curb, Walkway, Mow Curb or Building GROUND COVER PLANTING PATTERN 8420 New Standard BL JDW 1-04 Remove chart; Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 OC Spacing (X) Plant (type per plans) REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 5' 1"10"FGFGFront CONTROLLER PEDESTAL MOUNT CONTROLLER GROUND MOUNT GENERAL NOTES: A.All exposed conduit shall be Schedule 80. B.Install Controller and Telemetry equipment required for the site as specified by the City Parks Maintenance Division. C.Attach Recycled Water adhesive warning decal per Engineering Standard 8810 to inside and outside of cabinet door when used to control recycled water. NOTES: 38" Ø x 4" Lag Bolts. Connect to building wall or, where wall is not available, mount to 4" x 6" Pressure Treated Douglas Fir post. Controller / Stainless Steel Enclosure 2" Ø PVC Conduit w/ Irrigation Control Wires 34" Ø PVC Conduit w/ 120 volt Power Source PVC Sweep Ells for Conduit 532" - 14" Ø Anchor Bolts Class 3 PCC Footing 4" Class 3 PCC Pad 4" Class 2 Aggregate Base Class 3 PCC Post Footing when Post Mount is used Ground Rod 6" ea. side 24" min. 24" min. 18" 24" IRRIGATION CONTROLLER 8520 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 Add Note 12 SR BL 3-06 Delete Note 12 DVB BL 11-06 1 2 3 4 11 8 9 5 10 2 3 4 6 11 8 9 75 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 GENERAL NOTES: A.Locate valves in shrub areas whenever possible. B.Valve boxes shall be a maximum of 12" from walkways or curbs. C.Valve boxes shall be set parallel to walkways or curbs. D.Flow meter size and pipe size must be equal. E.No splices are allowed in wiring except at connectors shown (in box.) INSTALLATION NOTES: PVC Union Master Valve - normally open PVC Male Adapter Flow Sensor Specialized Shielded Cable (EV-CAB-SEN) (1-Flow Meter, 1-Common) - Mazimum distance between meter and controller is 2000' - 14 gauge Master Valve Controller Wires (1-Valve, 1-Common) Plastic Valve Box with bolt down lid. Bolts to be stainless steel. Carson Industries 1419-3B (Purple) for Recycled Water Valves up to 2" Carson Industries 1324-3B (Purple) for Recycled Water Valve 212" and larger Irrigation Pressure Mainline Galvanized Cloth set under box - 12" Grid Gravel - 34" to 112" in size Cement Blocks or Brick continuous for box support Flow Sensor - RainMaster Attach Recycled Water Warning Tab per Engineering Standard 8810 when used in recycled water system. U/S distance equals ten (10) times the Flow Meter size. D/S distance equals five (5) times the Flow Meter size. MASTER VALVE & FLOW SENSOR 8550 Edit Note 11, add PVC Union JDL BL 6-12 Revise Notes 2 and 11 MH BL 11-09 Update Note s 4 and 5 SR BL 8-11 FG5/8"3"12"U/S 13 D/S 13 typ.typ. typ. flow typ. typ. 8" typ. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 7 1 3 2 512 8 109 11 12 4 6 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 FG **BACKFLOW DEVICES SHALL BE INSPECTED BY THE LOCAL DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES AND THE CITY OF SAN LUIS OBISPO UTILITIES DEPARTMENT**12" min.18" max.12" Wrap with Rebar and 3 mil Blanket, typ. 9 10 9 7 11 6 4 5 321 6 GENERAL NOTES: A.All pipe shall be schedule copper or brass unless otherwise specified. B.Dissimilar metals shall be separated by an approved dielectric coupling. C.Service assembly shall be installed as the first assembly after the meter. D.Device shall be located within 10' of water meter and no connection or tees are allowed between the meter and the assembly. INSTALLATION NOTES: WYE STRAINER: Barrel position 45° from horizontal for below ground installations BALL VALVE: Brass FOR POTABLE SERVICE: Backflow Assembly (reduced pressure type), FEBCO/WILKINS FOR RECYCLED SERVICE: Pressure Regulator. Where there is no backflow assembly, place wye strainer and regulator in paired boxes installed per Engineering Standard 8550. LOCKING ENCLOSURE: Secure to pad per manufacturer's direction. Enclosure shall not be field-painted. All coatings shall be completed by manufacturer. Model: Strongbox #SBBC Series, expanded metal, dark green powder-coated, low profile, smooth touch, vandal resistant ELBOW UNION: Brass CONCRETE PAD: Class 3, 60" x 24" x 4" on 14" Class 3 Base, with 2% cross-slope for drainage SUPPLY LINE THRUST BLOCK IRRIGATION PRESSURE LINE RECYCLED WATER WARNING TAG: Attach per Engineering Standard 8810 when used for recycled water. 8 IRRIGATION SERVICE ASSEMBLY 8560 Revised Note 1 MH BL 11-09 Revised title; Drafting edits JDL MH 10-12 Revised Notes 3, 4 & 5 DVB BL 10-07 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 GENERAL NOTES: A.Pressure lines shall be per the Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted. B.Lateral lines shall be Class 200 unless otherwise noted. C.Control wires shall be taped together at 5' intervals. Where control wires share a trench with pressure lines, they shall be placed below the 4 o'clock and 8 o'clock position under the pressure line. D.Thrust blocks shall be installed at mainline turns, elbows, tees, caps, plugs, changes in direction, at terminal points of all rubber gasket piping and at any other additional points shown on the plans. INSTALLATION NOTES: Select backfill compacted to 90%, with native above to grade compacted to 85%. Native material to be fine earth material free from clods, rocks, and other large matter. If existing soil is not acceptable, the Contractor shall import soil as backfill. 3" Detectable Marker Tape marked "WATER" or "NON-POTABLE WATER" depending on the irrigation supply source. Thor Enterprises (distributed by T. Christy Enterprises) Direction of flow Class 3 PCC Thrust Block, sized as needed for pressure. X 18"12" FG 4" 1 PRESSURE LINE & CONTROL WIRES CONTROL WIRES & COMPUTER CONTROL CABLE LATERAL LINE 12" typ. typ. 6" TRENCH DETAILS THRUST BLOCKS X = 18" for sizes 2" and smaller in planter areas X = 24" for sizes over 2" and conduit under pavement X = 24" for conduit for high voltage wiring 1 4" TRENCH DETAIL & THRUST BLOCKS 8610 New Standard BL JDW 1-04 Revise Lateral Line detail DVB BL 11-08 Revise Installation Note 1 JDL BL 5-12 1 2 3 4 3 4 typ. FG FG 2 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 3" GENERAL NOTES: A.Locate valves in shrub areas whenever possible. B.Valve boxes shall be a maximum of 12" from walkways or curbs. C.Valve boxes shall be set parallel to walkways or curbs. D.One valve per box. INSTALLATION NOTES: Connector: King One Step Model 70-566 30 Volt Rain Bird Snaptite with sealer #ST-03 Grey PT-S5 14 gauge Direct Burial Wire with 12" expansion coil (1- valve, 1- common) Plastic Valve Box with bolt-down lid, bolts to be stainless steel: Carson Industries 1419-3B (purple) for Recycled Water Valves up to 2" Carson Industries 1324-3B (purple) for Recycled Water Valves 212" and larger 2" diameter aluminum or plastic Valve Tag, attach with non-ferrous wire, engrave with valve station number. Cement Block (4 total) under each box corner Irrigation Lateral Line PVC Union Gravel - 34" to 112" in size Irrigation Pressure Line Galvanized Cloth set under box - 12" grid Control Valve: Irritrol 100 Series Attach Recycled Water Warning Tag per Engineering Standard 8810 when used for recycled water. 4" 5/8" 4" 12" 8"#ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVE & BOX 8620 Edit Note 11, add PVC Union JDL BL 6-12 Revise Note 3, Add 12 SR BL 3-06 Revise Note 2 SR BL 8-11 FG 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 12 11 21 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 GENERAL NOTES: A.Locate valves in shrub areas whenever possible. B.Valve boxes shall be a maximum of 12" from walkways or curbs. C.Valve boxes shall be set parallel to walkways or curbs. D.One valve per box. E.Areas where recycled water may be used shall have purple box covers. F.Pipe shall be Schedule 40 PVC unless otherwise noted. INSTALLATION NOTES: Round Plastic Valve Box: Carson #910-12B Quick Coupler Valve: Rain Bird #44, use #44NP for Recycled Water Stainless Steel Clamp Schedule 80 Nipple Cement Block (4 total) under each box corner when box is located in turf area Tee connected to irrigation pressure line 14" x 1" x 30" Angle Iron Gravel: 34" to 112" in size Schedule 80 Ell Galvanized Cloth set under box, 12" grid FG 5/8" 4" 12" 8" 1" typ. QUICK COUPLER VALVE and BOX 8630 New Standard BL JDW 1-04 Revise Notes E and 2 SR BL 3-06 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 10 5 6 4 7 8 9 typ. typ. typ. typ. REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 5/8" 12" typ. FLOW 6" 8" Single Irrigation Valve OR Multiple Irrigation Valves in one area GENERAL NOTES: A.Isolation valves shall be installed for all irrigation valves. B.Locate valves in shrub areas whenever possible. C.Valve boxes shall be a maximum of 12" from walkways or curbs. D.Valve boxes shall be set parallel to walkways or curbs. E.Valve size and pipe size must be equal. INSTALLATION NOTES: Plastic Valve Box with bolt-down lid. Bolts to be stainless steel: Carson Industries 1419-3B (purple) for Recycled Water Valves up to 2" Carson Industries 1324-3B (purple) for Recycled Water Valves 212" and larger PVC Union Brass Ball Valve Schedule 40 Pressure Line Galvanized Cloth set under box: 12" grid Concrete block below valve, extending 6" beyond outside dimensions of valve #10 Reinforcing Bar looped over valve - Only for valves 212" and larger Gravel: 34" to 112" in size Cement Blocks or Brick continuous for box support Attach Recycled Water Warning Tag per Engineering Standard 8610 when used for recycled water. ISOLATION VALVE 8640 Add PVC Union; drafting edits JDL BL 6-12 Revised Notes and Detail MH BL 10-05 Revise Note 1; Add Note 10 SR BL 3-06 FG 1 2 3 10 45 6 7 8 9 typ. 3" Water Main 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 GENERAL NOTES: A.Where system is or has the potential to hook up to non-potable water, rotor head shall have a Reclaimed Water cover. B.Pipe material shall be Class 200 PVC unless otherwise noted. INSTALLATION NOTES: Rotor or Spray Pop-up or Hi-pop Body, set even with finished grade. Triple Swing Joint, Marlex (3) Irrigation Lateral Line Schedule 80 Nipple Pop-up height to be above matured plant material height. Distance must be 2 feet but may be reduced to 2 inches where overspray to adjacent impervious surface runs off to vegetated area. 12" 6 FG POP-UP HEAD 8650 Added note 6 MH BL 1-14 Revise offset from curb DVB BL 11-07 Pop-up height (Note 5)JDL BL 6-12 1 2 3 2 4 5 1 Curb, Paving or Walkway 2 3 4 5 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: 6 May 2018 X 4" GENERAL NOTES: A.Lateral lines shall be class 200 unless otherwise noted. B.All drip irrigation lines and emitters shall be installed below mulch layer. C.Total length of drip tubing not to exceed 150'. D.Ends of drip tube shall be no more than 3' from edge of hardscape in valve box as shown. E.In areas where recycled water will or could be used, all tubing shall be purple for use with recycled water. INSTALLATION NOTES: Drip Tee PVC Ell 12" Staple @ 5' O.C. - Soil Saver Drip Tubing - 58"PVC Irrigation Lateral Line - 34"Center of Plant Drip Thread / Slip Adapter Drip Ell Pressure Line Valve PVC Slip / Thread Adapter Emitter - Pressure compensating, Manual Flush Valve Self-flushing RISER DETAILS EMITTERS Sidewalk FG 12" 858" typ. 1-Gallon or 4" #5 Tree Tree Size X (in) 15-Gallon 18 24" Box 24 40" Box 40 typ. DRIP LAYOUT < 50' Plant Spacing > 50' < 150' DRIP IRRIGATION 8660 New Standard BL JDW 1-04 Added Note E SR BL 3-06 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 11 12 10 2 11 12 typ. each end 8 2 1028 9 typ. FG 712 3 5 4 6 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 GENERAL NOTES: A.Where system is or has the potential to hook up to non-potable water, rotor head shall have a Reclaimed Water cover. B.Pipe material shall be Class 200 PCV. C.See Engineering Standards for tree planting. D.Minimum of one (1) bubbler per tree or as specified on the plans. INSTALLATION NOTES: Bubbler Pop-up, set even with finished grade: Rain Bird Triple Swing Joint: Marlex (3) Irrigation Lateral Line Schedule 80 PVC Nipple 4" deep Mulch 5 gallon tree: 36" diameter around tree 15 gallon tree: 48" diameter around tree 24" box: 72" diameter around tree Backfill per Standard Specifications FG 18" 4" TREE BUBBLER 8670 New Standard BL JDW 1-04 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 Delete Note 7 SR BL Root Ball 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 5 3 6 2 4 2 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 SECTION GENERAL NOTES: A.14" Felt expansion joints at 20' intervals, at change in direction, at beginnings/ends of curves, and where mow strip abuts other structures. INSTALLATION NOTES: Class 3 Concrete, light broom finish. No color unless specified in contract documents. #3 Reinforcing bar continuous at center. 18" overlap at splice. Class 3 base. No recycled AC base allowed. CONCRETE EDGING 8710 New Standard BL BL 5-12 Drafting edits JDL MH 10-126"4"6" R = 12" 1 2 3 12" Abutting hardscape 1" in turf or other landscape areas 1 2 3 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 Front Back RECYCLED WATER WARNING TAGS PLASTIC WARNING PLATE ADHESIVE WARNING DECAL RECYCLED WATER WARNING TAGS: ·Shall be high durability polyurethane. ·The tag shall be 3" x 4" in size with attachment neck and reinforced attachment hole. ·All lettering shall be hot stamped in black on a purple tag. ·Tags shall be attached with non-ferrous wire. ·Christy's ID-MAX-P2-RC-009 or approved equal, attached as shown in Engineering Standards. PLASTIC WARNING PLATES: ·Shall be Christy's #3800 or equal. ·Warning Plates shall be made of purple UV resistant co-polymer plastic, and installed with tamper-proof rivets. ADHESIVE DECALS: ·Warning Decals shall be Christy's #ID-4200 or equal. ·Warning Decals shall be made on a 3.5 mil flexible vinyl base, with permanent acrylic adhesive backing on a 90# stay-flat liner. ·Riser Decals shall be Christy's #5100 or equal. ·Riser Decals shall be approximately 212" x 3" and capable of being wrapped around and attached to a sprinkler riser. ·Background shall be printed with a purple UV cured vinyl ink. Legend printing shall be in black with a UV cured vinyl ink. ·The entire decal shall be clear flood over-printed for superior weathering and UV protection. ADHESIVE RISER DECAL RECYCLED WATER WARNING TAGS, LABELS and DECALS 8810 New Standard SR BL 3-06 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 RECYCLED WATER DO NOT DRINK - NO TOMAR Warning: Recycled Water Do Not Drink RECYCLED WATER DO NOT DRINK AVISO NO TOME EL AGUA RECICLADA RECYCLED WATER DO NOT DRINK AVISO NO TOME EL AGUA RECICLADA RECYCLED WATER DO NOT DRINK AVISO NO TOME EL AGUA RECICLADA RECYCLED WATER DO NOT DRINK NO TOME EL AGUA REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 GENERAL NOTES: A.All signs shall be sign grade aluminum, .080" thick, with white letters on a purple background. Signs shall include language stating that "Recycled Water" is used for irrigation, shall contain the the warning "DO NOT DRINK", and shall include the industry standard symbol: B.The small signs shall be a minimum of 8" wide and 10" high. C.Small signs shall be mounted to U-channel, 2 lbs. hot rolled high tensile rail or billet steel with galvanized finish per ASTM A-123. Sign post shall extend 4'3" below grade. D.Large signs shall be a minimum of 18" high and 24" wide. E.Large signs shall be mounted to chain link fence in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F.All mounting hardware shall be stainless steel. G.Height of signs will depend on location and surrounding landscape plant types (min. height shall be 3'). In all cases, sign shall be visible to the public. H.Sign letters shall be reflective material. I.Signs shall be located as shown on the plans. As a minimum, signs shall be placed at each entrance to the area where recycled water will be used. Signs must be placed where they can be easily seen, and no further than 1000' apart unless approved by the Water Reuse Coordinator. For unfenced areas, signs shall be placed at sidewalks and crosswalks, driveway entrances, corners, outdoor eating areas, and as otherwise required. For medians, a sign shall be placed at the beginning and end of the median. Longer medians may require an additional sign be placed near the middle, equidistant from the ends of the median. For fenced areas, signs must be placed at each fence opening. J.Post shall be installed per Engineering Standard 7210 mounting height. RECYCLED WATER WARNING SIGNS 8820 New Standard SR BL 3-06 Revise Notes for standard signs DVB BL 10-07 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 DETACHED SIDEWALK INTEGRAL SIDEWALK MAIL BOX LOCATION 9010 New border JDL WAP 1-98 Revise Code Section JDL WAP 10-93 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 Municipal Code Section 12.40.040 (a) In a residential zone, it is unlawful for any person to install or maintain or to direct, authorize or permit the installation or maintenance of a mail box, a receptacle for newspaper delivery, or any other container to be used for delivery purposed in, upon or over an portion of the space or area between a street curb and the back edge of an improved sidewalk. 6" min. 5'Varies ⅊ Varies Varies 6" min. ⅊ REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 MONUMENT SECTION A - A AA A1 ALTERNATE METHODS A1 -Base may be cast with a cylindrical recess which shall later be filled with expansive grout (min. 2500 psi) when pin is set. A2 -A brass cap may be set with the base pour so that center of cap is within 58" of the monument point. Point shall be marked with a cross, etched a minimum of 116" deep into the brass. The cap shall be marked with the License information or a tag with the information shall be attached. MONUMENT and WELL 9020 New border JDL WAP 1-98 Added Alternate A2 BL JDW 4-02 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 Pavement 10" 10" COLLAR: Collar shall be constructed per Engineering Standard 6040TRAFFIC VALVE BOX and COVER: CHRISTY G-5 or approved equal. Cover shall be imprinted with "MONUMENT". PIN: Brazing rod, 0.125" - 0.200 Ø, with numbered brass tag. Pin shall be set by Surveyor or Civil Engineer and the point permanently marked with registration number. BASE: Class 3 PCC. Top surface shall be smooth, bottom shall be flared as shown. 58" min. clearance all around 14" 18" 4" 14" 1" max. 3" min. R.E. Tag R.E. Tag REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: 12" min. May 2018 AA SECTION A - A PLAN CITY COMM 18" min. 6" 6" 3" MANHOLE COVER & ACCESS BOX CITY COMMUNICATIONS 9030 New Standard JDL WAP 8-99 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 Revise Class 2 Note SR BL 1-14 * In sidewalk applications, install ring and cover per Engineering Standard 3350. Cover shall be lettered "CITY COMM" Manhole Cover and Frame shall be PHOENIX P-1090, S.B. FOUNDRIES 1900 or equal. * Manhole Collar shall be constructed per Engineering Standard 6040 12" Grout at bottom (top of Rock Bedding) Grade Rings per Eng. Standard 6040 Sand Class 2 concrete New or (E) Conduit 34" Rock Bedding, 6" min. thickness 1" PVC Drain REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 12" PARKS and PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY BENCH CITY BENCH 9040 New Standard SR BL 11-08 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 OPEN SPACE BENCH 12"12"12" 12" 4" 4" 4" 4" 2% 2% 3 Renaissance Memorial Bench, 2806-6-MP Green for all other parks Class 3 PCC, 2"-4" Slump, Broom Finish, 12" wider than bench on all sidesClass 2 Aggregate Base or Class 3 Aggregate Base compacted to 95%516" x 3" Wedge-all Bolt, (4) per bench Class 3 PCC, 2"-4" Slump, Broom Finish, 12" wider than bench on all sidesClass 2 Aggregate Base or Class 3 Aggregate Base compacted to 95%12" x 3" Wedge-all Bolt, (4) per bench 1 88 Series PL DuMor, Inc. with back or equivalent 2 139 Series DuMor, Inc. without back or equivalent NOTES: Style for Damon-Garcia and Laguna Lake Parks Style for Open Space Style for all other parks 1 2 3 12"12"12" REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 SECTION ELEVATION INSTALLATION NOTES: 6" x 6" Pressure Treated Douglas Fir Post, re-treat all cuts 2" x6" (12 ft length) Pressure Treated Douglas Fir, re-treat all cuts Class 3 PCC Footing, slope top 2% in all directions 112" Ø Round Rock 58" Carriage Bolt w/ 3" Torque Washer at front and 2" Timber Washer at rear Nail board ends with (2)- 4" Galvanized Nails. Finish Grade Wrap post, within limits of concrete, with 15 lb Felt Paper. 2% RAIL FENCE 9050 New Standard JDL BL 1-10 Drafting edits JDL MH 6-13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Alternate rail ends 72" O.C. 5 12" max. 16" 6 2 7 2 1" Chamfer 1 5 42" 24" 10" 14" 8 3 4 REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF:May 2018 8"2' - 7"FINISH GRADE CLEAN OUT ASSEMBLY GENERAL NOTES: Trash containers shall be TimberForm® Renaissance™ series Model No. 2816-ST-M "SLO Litter Container", manufactured by Columbia Cascade Company, or approved equal. A.MATERIALS and DESIGN Frame shall be fabricated from 1 inch ID Schedule 40 mild steel seamless pipe. Side slats shall be 0.188 inch thick x 1-1/2 inch wide formed mild steel. Container shall have a side-opening door that locks in place with a thumb latch locking mechanism. Litter container shall include a separate matching sorting top for recycling bottles and cans and a 32-gallon recycled plastic liner with two hand holds for easy removal and emptying. Sorting top shall be fabricated from 11 gauge steel plate and shall have two side openings for trash, top opening for recyclable materials and a stainless steel sliding trap door. Top at opposite sides shall have applied clear adhesive graphics with white lettering designating separate openings for bottles/cans and trash and a large recycling logo. Sorting top shall remain locked in place until released by opening of the side-opening latch locking mechanism that utilizes a removable handle or Allen wrench for unlocking. Overall dimensions shall be approximately 26” diameter and 45” in height. Container shall be surface mounted flush with the sidewalk surface and will have built in leveling capability in accordance with manufactures recommendations. B.CONSTRUCTION Entire litter container body, except for separate liner, and sorting top shall be assembled and welded into single units. Welds shall be smooth and continuous with no gaps or pin holes. Final product shall be free of weld spatters and burrs. C.FINISH Steel and cast iron parts shall be coated with UV resistant exterior grade polyester powder coating applied to a minimum thickness of 6 mils. Color shall be Dark Forest Green (RAL6009) to match City standard colors for downtown and black in all other locations. Liquid, epoxy or lead-containing powder coatings are not acceptable. TRASH CONTAINER STANDARD 9060 Opening to litter container JDL DA 10-15 Drafting edits JDL MH 3-13 Revise Note C SR BL 1-14 2' - 2" DIA. POWDER-COATED STEEL, COLOR RAL6009 CLEANOUT ASSEMBLY WITH SLIDING DOOR 916" DIA. HOLE FOR 12" x 3" WEDGE-ALL BOLT, TYP. LITTER CONTAINER WITH DOOR AND HEX KEYED LOCK, ASSEMBLY 16111-A01 SORTING TOP ASSEMBLY RECYCLE SYMBOL 9" REVISIONS BY APP DATE STANDARD CURRENT AS OF: 1' - 3" DIA. MAX. OPENING TO LITTER CONTAINER (BELOW SORTING TOP)9"May 2018 APPENDICES A. STATE STANDARD CURB RAMP DETAILS B. MISSION STYLE SIDEWALK DISTRICT C. RAILROAD DISTRICT PLAN D. LIST OF ARTERIAL AND COLLECTOR STREETS E. SAMPLE NOTICE OF STREET MAINTENANCE (DOOR HANGER) F. PLAN DEVELOPMENT STANDARDS G. GUIDELINES FOR CONSTRUCTION ZONES H. SLO COUNTY APCD: PERMIT TO OPERATE NO. 1850-2 I. GUIDELINE SPECIFICATIONS FOR NURSERY TREE QUALITY J. QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM K. TEMPORARY INDUSTRIAL WASTE DISCHARGE PERMIT APPLICATION L. ENCROACHMENT PERMIT / CIP HOLIDAY RESTRICTION AREA Appendix A Appendix A List of Arterial and Collector Streets For Pavement Restoration Purposes Only Appendix D Arterial Streets (for pavement restoration purposes): Street From To Broad Street Higuera Street south city limit California Blvd (all) Chorro Street Lincoln Pismo Street Dalidio Drive (all) Foothill Blvd west city limit California Blvd Grand Avenue Slack Street Monterey Street Highland Drive Chorro Santa Rosa Street Higuera Street south city limit Johnson Avenue Johnson Avenue Monterey Orcutt Road Laurel Lane Johnson Avenue Orcutt Road Los Osos Valley Road (all) Madonna Road Los Osos Valley Road Higuera Street Marsh Street 101 freeway California Monterey Street Chorro Street 101 freeway Nipomo Street Marsh Higuera Orcutt Road (all) Osos Street Higuera Street Santa Barbara Prado Road (all) San Luis Drive California Blvd Johnson Avenue Santa Barbara Avenue Broad Osos Santa Rosa Street north city limit Pismo Street South Street Higuera Broad Street Tank Farm Road (all) Collector Streets (for pavement restoration purposes): Street From To Augusta Street Bishop Street Laurel Lane Auto Park Way Los Osos Valley Road east end Bishop Street Bushnell Street Johnson Avenue Broad Street Foothill Blvd 101 freeway Buchon Street High Street Johnson Avenue Bullock Lane (all) Casa Murray Calle Joaquin (all) Capitolio Broad Sacramento Chorro Street Highland Drive Lincoln Chorro Street Broad Pismo Cross Street Short Street Long Street Cuesta Foothill Highland Del Rio Descanso Prefumo Canyon Road Descanso Los Osos Valley Road Del Rio El Mercado Madonna Road south end Elks Lane Higuera Prado Fredericks Street Hathway Avenue Grand Avenue High Street Higuera Street Broad Street Highland Drive Patricia Drive Chorro Street Industrial Way Broad Street Sacramento Johnson Avenue Phillips Lane Mill Street La Entrada Foothill Ramona Lincoln Avenue Broad Street Chorro Street Long Street Tank Farm Road Cross Street Margarita Avenue (all) Mill Street Chorro Street Grand Avenue Murray Santa Rosa Casa List of Arterial and Collector Streets For Pavement Restoration Purposes Only Appendix D Collector Streets (for pavement restoration purposes): Street From To Nipomo Marsh Pismo Oceanaire Drive (all) Osos Street Peach Street Monterey Street Osos Street Santa Barbara railroad station parking lot Palm Street Chorro Street Johnson Patricia Drive Highland Drive Foothill Blvd Peach Street Osos Street Santa Rosa Pepper Street Phillips Lane Mill Street Phillips Lane Johnson Avenue Pepper Street Pismo Street Higuera Street Johnson Avenue Prefumo Canyon Road west city limit Los Osos Valley Road Ramona Drive La Entrada Broad Street Sacramento Industrial Way Orcutt Santa Fe (all) Santa Rosa Pismo Railroad Short Street Cross Street Suburban Road Southwood Drive Laurel Lane Johnson Avenue Suburban Road South Higuera Street Short Street Tassajara Drive Foothill Blvd Ramona Drive Sample Notice of Street Maintenance (Door Hanger) Appendix E CITY OF SAN LUIS OBISPO NOTICE OF STREET MAINTENANCE TO AREA BUSINESSES AND RESIDENCES Please be advised that, on the dates listed below, ________________________, ACTING AS CONTRACTOR FOR THE City of San Luis Obispo, will be Slurry Sealing your street. Other streets in your neighborhood may be scheduled for other dates. The general order of work will be as follows: 1. Positing of “No Parking” Signs 72 hours in advance of the work. 2. Partial or full closure of the roadway. 3. Placement of slurry seal and four-hour cure time. 4. Reopen the road to public traffic. 5. Replacement of traffic striping and markings will occur at a later date. The work on your street will be performed on the following dates: Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Prior to 8:00 am on the day of work, please park your vehicle on a nearby street that is not posted with parking restrictions. Driving on a slurry seal prior to completion of the cure time may cause damage to the slurry seal and your vehicle. DELIVERIES AND APPOINTMENTS In an effort to expedite the slurry process and avoid drive-thru’s which would require closing the street again, please schedule any kind of delivery or appointment the day before or the day after the street is to be slurry sealed. Unfavorable weather conditions may cause delays to the work without additional notice. If you should have any questions please contact the following: ___________________________________________________ Contractor’s name Telephone number Appendix F PLAN DEVELOPMENT STANDARDS REQUIRED USE OF STANDARD Use of this standard is required for use on: All projects, including mapping, that are City funded All projects which will be turned over to the City for adoption or maintenance All Final (Tract) and Parcel Maps (this standard supplements provisions of the Subdivision Map Act) DATUM Drawings and maps shall be set into real world coordinates and elevations using the City’s horizontal and vertical control networks. The Datum used shall be referenced on the cover sheet. Plans based on information furnished by the City, from old plans or survey data, shall include references to the City Plan number, file number, field book number, etc. Any new bench marks and monuments should be shown on the plans with the associated coordinates and / or elevation. Horizontal Control The City has established a horizontal control network relative to the California Coordinate System Zone Five, which is defined in Section 8801 through 8819 of the California Public Resources Code. For all projects and maps, two different exterior points or corners shall be tied to at least two different points of the City's horizontal control network for direct import into the Geographic Information System (GIS) database and AutoCAD. The Horizontal Control Network is available from the Public Works Department. Vertical Control The City has established a vertical control network. All projects shall be tied to the nearest bench mark elevation. The Bench Mark System is available from the Public Works Department. Grading Plans Finish and existing grades shall be shown by use of contours on grading plans. Where grades are too flat for contours to be meaningful, grades shall be called out showing existing and final elevations for a number of points reasonable to represent critical grades and drainage. All contours and elevations shall reflect current City Datum. UNITS OF MEASUREMENT All project plans and maps shall be prepared in English units unless written permission has been obtained from the Director of Public Works Appendix F DRAWINGS Software Drawings are to be produced using AutoCAD or Civil 3D compatible with the current version in use by the City. Other programs which produce an AutoCAD drawing may be acceptable; however, if there are incompatibility problems, the project will be rejected until compatible files are produced. Drawing Sheets Drawing sheet borders shall be fully contained on a 22” x 34” sheet. The border should reduce 50% to fit completely on an 11” x 17” sheet. Drawings shall be plotted on sheets no larger than 24” x 36”. The City recommends use of the electronic files available from the City. These files have already been sized for ease of reduction, contain blocks, typical layers, line types and color assignments. In lieu of the profile sheet, grids generated by design software may be substituted. Improvement Plans submitted to the City shall have the standard title block shown in the plan and cover sheets available electronically from the City for privately funded projects. Map Sheets Map sheet shall be 18” x 26” with a border 1 inch inside the edge of the sheet in accordance with the Map Act. Naming Conventions The following naming convention shall be used to identify the drawings: For projects developed in ACAD 2000 or higher version: Complete the drawing in model space and use the layout tabs for sheet layout in paper space: City Specification No. (Tract No.,MS No., Parcel Map No.)_01.dwg Cover Sheet Drawing City Specification No. (Tract No.,MS No., Parcel Map No.)_00.dwg Model and Layout Drawing Ex: Tract 452_01.dwg If desired, the cover sheet may be incorporated in the main drawing using the _00 extension for the entire project. For projects developed in earlier versions (without layout tabs): City Specification No. (Tract No., MS No., Parcel Map No.)_00.dwg for model space drawing City Specification No. (Tract No., MS No., Parcel Map No.)_01.dwg for Cover Sheet City Specification No. (Tract No., MS No., Parcel Map No.)_02.dwg for Sheet 2 (XXXX_00.dwg is to be bound to the sheet drawing.) Continue numbering (xxxx_xx.dwg) for required number of sheets If drawing sheets are modified during construction and new sheets are printed, they shall use the sheet number and a letter following to designate the change. Ex. Tract 400_05A.dwg Appendix F The preferred practice is for page numbers to be sequential for the entire plan set. Where the project contains multiple disciplines, landscaping, electrical, etc., the City will accept multiple drawings named as shown above. Ex: Tract 452_E00 for the electrical drawing Tract 452_M00 for the mechanical drawing Tract 452_L00 for the landscape plan, etc. Model Space and Paper Space Drawings are to be generated in model space and then plotted with borders in paper space. Refer to the software manual for additional information. Drawings shall be done in full scale (one drawing unit = 1 foot,) actual dimensions in model space. All borders and titles shall be done in paper space. Scaling of model space drawing to fit paper size shall be done using viewports and model view scaling. General Drawing Content Drawings shall contain the following minimum elements: Title Block North Arrow Creek & Street Names Vicinity Map Bar Scale Centerline Monuments Dimensions Date Lot lines & numbers Stationing Legends Tract Name & number Bench Marks Easements Bearings, radii, etc. Topography Elevations Existing Utilites Datum Reference Trees & Driplines Engineering Standard with numbers referenced Tree diameter shall be accurately represented. Drip lines shall be shown for any tree not permitted for removal. Grading, utility and landscape plans shall not be combined on the same sheet. Curves shall show radius, delta, curve length and control for BC and EC to allow construction. External References (xrefs) Xrefs shall be bound to or inserted in the drawing in which they are needed for printing. Xrefs used during design, but not displayed for printing shall be detached. User Coordinate System (UCS) When rotation is necessary for plotting, a UCS shall be used in lieu of rotating the drawing out of the original orientation. Stationing Stationing shall be north to south or west to east running left to right on the paper. Beginning stationing shall be tied to an existing centerline intersection. Coordinates for the beginning station and ending station shall be shown on the plans. Alignments and stationing should be on a street centerline when work will occur within a street. Profiles can be generated either on the centerline or offset, as long as their location is clearly defined on the profile. Appendix F On City funded projects (Capital Improvement Program) stationing for different streets in the same project shall not have duplicate stationing numbers. Ex: A Street Waterline – Sta 1+00 to Sta 3+58, B Street Paving – Sta 4+00 to Sta 6+97 North Arrows and Bar Scales North arrows and bar scales shall be inserted in model space such that a north arrow and bar scale appear in each plan view when plotted. Blocks shall not be so ornate as to obscure their content. Scales Plotting scale shall be appropriate to the type of project allowing adequate detail clarity. Bar scales shall be inserted in model space such that a bar scale appears in each plan view when plotted. Scale should appear in the lower right hand corner whenever possible. For sheets containing both plan and profile information, a ratio of the Horizontal to the Vertical scale shall be shown in the title block. Example of typical scales: Utility, Grading and Street Improvements Plan 1” = 20’ Paving and Traffic Control Plan 1” = 100’ Signal Plan 1” = 10’ or 1” = 20’ Blocks Blocks shall be created on layer 0 at scale 1:1 with line type and color by layer. Layering Drawings shall provide separate layers for the various items shown in the drawings using appropriate layer prefixes to group related layers. See Appendix B for additional information. Where allowed by the program, layer “state” or settings for printing shall be saved and named print_sheet#. Civil 3D defaults may be used for layer naming. Alignment names should be selected to mimic the layering conventions set forth in the appendix to the degree possible, and layer names shall be generated using the alignment prefix option such that all layers related to the alignment begin with the alignment name. Color and Line Types All colors and line types shall be By Layer. Layer colors and line pen designations shall be those shown in the City prototype drawings. See Appendix C for additional information. Pen weights shall be those designated in the plot file for those colors associated with standard layers. Polylines shall not have an assigned width, but rather be given weight through pen designation. Generally, abandoned and existing facilities are shown with a fine line weight or at half tone, with abandoned facilities using hidden or dashed line types, in lieu of the standard Appendix F continuous line type. New facilities are shown in bolder line types. Line scale shall be set so that line types, other than continuous, repeat frequently enough to be clearly differentiated. Dimensions Dimensions shall have characteristics by layer. The dimensions shall appear on the text layer or a new layer specifically for dimensions. Dimensioning text shall be per this standard. Text Accepted fonts are limited to those native to the Windows operating system or furnished with AutoCAD or Civil 3D. Where new text styles are created, they should have the same name as the font used for that style. The use of AutoCAD’s predefined “Standard” text style, which defaults to the txt font type, is not encouraged. Text shall always be on a separate layer. Line labels shall be above the line and not cut into the line. Plotting Whenever possible, use the plot file furnished by the City. If this is not possible, save a plot file for the project and submit it with the drawing files. Plot file shall be named using the same naming convention as for drawings, with the default file name extension. RECORD DRAWINGS When construction is complete, a record drawing of the project shall be completed as set forth below. Record drawing layers may be added as need to provide proper printing for each sheet. Save the file using the naming convention as for drawings followed by R. Ex: Tract 452_E00R Record drawing for electrical sheets  Create a new layer and name it Record_Drawing  Set color to 200 and line type to continuous. Colors 201 & 202 may also be used as needed to address different line weights.  Record all record drawing information on the Record Drawing layer  Each sheet is to be “stamped” to note record drawings have been completed for that sheet. If no changes were made, a note to that effect is to be included adjacent to the stamp.  Each sheet is to be numbered with an “R” after the sheet number. Ex. 2R of 13  Set all pen colors but pen 200, 201, and 202 to color 253 or use the City standard plot file for record drawings.  Complete plotting of record drawing set SUBMITTALS Drawing files must be completely compatible with the current City AutoCAD standard program. Bond used for submittals shall be a minimum of 20lb. City funded projects All electronic files shall be submitted to the City. For projects developed using design software, the entire project folder shall be submitted, including all the sub folders with Appendix F drawings and supporting data. The electronic folder shall be submitted in the configuration generated by the software. Drawing file shall be purged of all unused layers, text, etc. Written specifications shall also be submitted in electronic format. Submit one original, stamped and signed, ink on bond, set of plans and one original stamped and signed set of specifications along with the electronic files prior to the start of construction. Submittal shall also include a complete Acrobat Adobe file bid package (Specifications and Plans.) Record drawings are to be submitted within 4 weeks of completion of construction and shall include a signed scan (.tif) or adobe file in addition to the drawing files. Files shall be submitted to the designated Project Manager for Capital Improvement projects. Privately funded projects Submit the electronic drawing files (.dwg) and any associated plot files along with one original, stamped and signed, ink on bond, set of plans prior to the start of construction or Map recording. Record drawings are to be submitted within 4 weeks of completion of construction and prior to City acceptance of the public improvements. Record drawing submittal shall include a hard copy original, stamped and signed, ink on bond; an electronic image copy (.tif or .pdf) of the original approved plans and record drawings interlaced, i.t. page 1, 1R, 2, 2R etc.; and the drawing file (.dwg). Submit this data either via email (for small projects) or on a CD containing the required data. Files shall be submitted to the Development Review Division Engineer. CITY DOCUMENTS ON LINE The following files are available from the City web site slocity.org:  Standard Cover Sheet for City funded projects  Standard Cover Sheet for private funded projects  Standard Plan Sheet for City funded projects  Standard Plan Sheet for private funded projects  Standard Profile Sheet for private funded projects  Standard plot file for draft construction plans –17” x 11”  Standard plot file for original construction plans –34” x 22”  Standard plot file for Record Drawings  Horizontal Control Network  Bench Mark System Appendix F LAYER COLOR AND LINE TYPE CONVENTIONS Layer Prefixes: F Layers showing future facilities. X Layers showing existing information and facilities. XABD Layers showing abandoned facilities such as water lines, sewer lines, etc. N Layers showing new or proposed information and facilities. 0 (zero) Layers that are in Paper Space, such as borders and border titles. ADRS Layers showing site addresses BLDG Layers showing buildings and other structures CCOM Layers showing City owned communication facilities CL Layers showing centerline information CTL Layers showing monuments, bench marks or other control points CLM Layers showing City Limit lines EASE Layers showing easements or other rights of entry ELEC Layers showing electric facilities and joint electric and phone/cable poles EP Layers showing edge of pavement GAS Layers showing gas facilities HATCH Layers showing hatching LTG Layers showing lighting OIL Layers showing oil facilities PL Layers showing property lines / parcel lines PNT Layers showing survey points and associated data ROW Layers showing right of way lines S Layers showing sanitary sewer facilities SD Layers showing storm drain systems including large culverts and bridges. SW Layers showing sidewalks, curbs and gutter TEL Layers showing telephone & telecommunication facilities TC Layers showing traffic control, including signs and striping TS Layers showing traffic signal facilities TV Layers showing television / cable facilities TXT Layers showing text VEG Layers showing vegetation W Layers showing potable water facilities 3W Layers showing non-potable water facilities including tertiary treated water Layer prefixes should be combined as appropriate and additional description added as needed. Ex: XABD-W-TXT A layer showing abandoned water facilities text X-SD-County A layer showing existing storm drain facilities under County jurisdiction N-S A layer showing new sewer facilities Appendix F LAYER COLOR AND LINE TYPE CONVENTIONS Facility Type Color Line Type Model Space Abandoned & Future All facilities 210 Hidden2 Text 210 Continuous Existing Addressing 12 Continuous Buildings / Structures 100 Continuous Cable TV 30 Continuous City Limits 21 Continuous Centerlines 1 Center2 City Communication Conduits 20 Dashdot2 Contours – Major 38 Dashed Contours – Minor 33 Dashed Curb, gutter & sidewalks 8 Continuous Easement 44 Continuous Edge of Pavement 8 Continuous Electric 11 Phantom Gas 50 Continuous Hatch 253 Continuous Lighting 52 Continuous Miscellaneous 4 Continuous Oil 51 Continuous Parcel lines 30 Continuous Points for Control – monuments & benchmarks 1 Continuous Points – other Any Continuous Right of Way 2 Continuous Railroad 41 Continuous Sanitary Sewer 3 Continuous Storm drains 74 Continuous Telephone & Other Communication Lines 23 Phantom2 Television 30 Continuous Text 5 Continuous Traffic Control 10 Continuous Traffic signals 10 Divide2 Vegetation 72 Continuous Water 5 Continuous Water – Reclaimed 212 Continuous Appendix F Facility Type Color Line Type Model Space New All facilities – main plan - heavier line weight 7 Continuous All facilities – details- lesser line weight 14 Continuous Text 6 Continuous Dimensions 105 Continuous Grid lines – Major 38 Continuous Grid lines – Minor 33 Continuous Contours – Major 16 Dashed Contours – Minor 13 Dashed Hatch 15 Continuous North arrow & scale 170 Continuous Record Drawings Record Drawing – heavy line weight 200 Continuous Record Drawing – medium line weight 203 Continuous Record Drawing – light line weight 201 Continuous Paper Space Border 174 Continuous Border Titles & Engineering Stamp 170 Continuous Viewports 255 Continuous Appendix F SORT BY COLOR NUMBER Facility Color Line Type Centerlines, Points for Control 1 Center2, Continous Right of Way, Railroad 2 Continuous Sanitary Sewer 3 Continuous Miscellaneous 4 Continuous Text, Water 5 Continuous (N) Text 6 Continuous (N) All facilities – main plan - heavier line weight 7 Continuous Curb, gutter & sidewalks, Edge of Pavement 8 Continuous Traffic Control, Traffic signals 10 Continuous, Divide2 Electric 11 Phantom Addressing 12 Continuous (N) Contours - minor 13 Dashed (N) All facilities – details- lesser line weight 14 Continuous (N) Hatch 15 Continuous (N) Contours major 16 Dashed City Communication Conduits 20 Dashdot2 City Limits 21 Continuous Telephone & Other Communication Lines 23 Phantom2 Cable TV, Parcel lines, 30 Continuous (N) Grid lines – Minor, (E) Contours – Minor 35 Continuous (N) Grid lines – Major, (E) Contours – Major 38 Continuous Easement 44 Continuous Gas 50 Continuous Oil 51 Continuous Lighting 52 Continuous Vegetation 72 Continuous Storm drains 74 Continuous Buildings / Structures 100 Continuous (N) Dimensions 105 Continuous Variable Layers & Line Weights * 110-169 Border Titles & Engineering Stamp 170 Continuous North arrow & scale, Border 174 Continuous Variable Layers & Line Weights * 180-199 Record Drawing – heavy line weight 200 Continuous Record Drawing – light line weight 201 Continuous Record Drawing – medium line weight 203 Continuous Future, (XA) All facilities, (XA) text 210 Hidden2, Continuous Water – Reclaimed 212 Continuous Variable Layers & Line Weights * 220-249 Hatch 253 Continuous Viewports 255 Continuous * see next page for line weights Appendix F Line Weight (mm) Unassigned Colors 0.00 110 111 164 165 0.05 112 113 166 167 0.09 114 115 168 169 0.10 116 117 180 181 250 - 255 0.13 118 119 182 183 0.15 120 121 184 185 0.18 122 123 186 187 0.20 124 125 188 189 0.25 126 127 190 191 0.30 128 129 192 193 0.35 130 131 194 195 0.40 132 133 196 197 0.45 134 135 198 199 0.50 136 137 220 221 0.53 138 139 222 223 0.60 140 141 224 225 248 (color250) 0.65 142 143 226 227 0.70 144 145 228 229 0.80 146 147 230 231 0.90 148 149 232 233 1.00 150 151 234 235 1.06 152 153 236 237 1.20 154 155 238 239 249 (color 250) 1.40 156 157 240 241 1.58 158 159 242 243 2.00 160 161 244 245 2.11 162 163 246 247 Appendix H Appendix H Appendix H Appendix H Appendix H Appendix H Appendix H Guideline Specifications for Nursery Tree Quality Selecting Quality Nursery Stock A committee comprised of municipal arborists, urban foresters, nurserymen, U.C. Coopera- tive Extension horticultural advisors, landscape architects, non–profit tree groups, horticul- tural consultants, etc., developed the attached specifications to ensure high quality landscape trees. After more than a year of work, they succeeded in drafting a document entitled Specifi- cation Guidelines for Container–grown Trees for California. This document will be published and the guidelines promoted throughout the nursery and landscape industry. Its intent is to help landscape professionals develop their own comprehensive and detailed specifications to ensure that they obtain high quality container–grown nursery trees. The document is also intended to help nursery professionals in their efforts to improve the quality of trees grown in California. These specifications can be modified for specific simulations. The following people worked on the Guideline Specifications for Nursery Tree Quality: David Burger UC Davis, Department of Environmental Horticulture, Davis Barrie Coate Consulting Arborist, Los Gatos Larry Costello UC Cooperative Extension, Half Moon Bay Robert Crudup Valley Crest Tree Company, Sunol Jim Geiger Center for Urban Forest Research UC Davis, Davis Bruce Hagen California Dept. of Forestry & Fire Protection, Santa Rosa Richard Harris UC Davis Department of Environmental Horticulture, Davis Brian Kempf Urban Tree Foundation, Visalia Jerry Koch City of Berkeley Division of Urban Forestry, Berkeley Bob Ludekens L. E. Cooke Company, Visalia Greg McPherson Center for Urban Forest Research, UC Davis, Davis Martha Ozonoff California ReLeaf, Sacramento Ed Perry UC Cooperative Extension, Stanislaus County Markio Roberts Caltrans, LDA Maintenance Division, Oakland Illustrations: Front page, c) temporary branches C. Trunk Taper Illustration by Edward F. Gilman, Professor, Environmental Horticulture Department, IFAS, University of Florida. All other Illustrations adapted from Integrated Management of Landscape Trees, Shrubs and Vines, Fourth Edition, 2003, Harris, Clark, Matheny Photos: Brian Kempf For more information contact Brian Kempf 559–713–0631 or brian@urbantree.org Appendix I Guideline Specifications for Nursery Tree Quality I. PROPER IDENTIFICATION All trees shall be true to name as ordered or shown on the planting plans and shall be labeled individually or in groups by species and cultivar (where appropriate). II. COMPLIANCE All trees shall comply with federal and state laws and regulations requiring inspection for plant disease, pests and weeds. Inspection certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment of plants. Clearance from the County Agricultural Commissioner, if required, shall be obtained before planting trees originating outside the county in which they are to be planted. Even though trees may conform to county, state, and federal laws, the buyer may impose additional requirements.Illustration by Edward F. Gilman, Professor,Environmental Horticulture Department, IFAS, University of Florida. III. TREE CHARACTERISTICS AT THE TIME OF SALE OR DELIVERY A. TREE HEALTH As typical for the species/cultivar, trees shall be healthy and vigorous, as indicated by an inspection for the following: 1. Trees shall be relatively free of pests (insects, pathogens, nematodes or other injurious organisms). 2. An inspection of the crown, trunk, and roots shall find the following characteristics: a. Crown Form: The form or shape of the crown is typical for a young specimen of the spe- cies/cultivar. The crown is not significantly deformed by wind, pruning practices, pests or other factors. b. Leaves: The size, color and appearance of leaves are typical for the time of year and stage of growth of the species/cultivar. Leaves are not stunted, misshapen, tattered, discolored (chlorotic or necrotic) or otherwise atypical. c. Branches: Shoot growth (length and diameter) throughout the crown is typical for the age/ size of the species/cultivar. Trees do not have dead, diseased, broken, distorted or other serious branch injuries. d. Trunk: The tree trunk should be fairly straight, vertical and free of wounds (except prop- erly–made pruning cuts), sunburned areas, conks (fungal fruiting bodies), wood cracks, bleeding areas, signs of boring insects, galls, cankers/lesions and girdling ties. e. Tree height and trunk diameter are typical for the age, species/cultivar and container size. f. Roots: The root system is free of injury from biotic (insects, pathogens, etc.) and abiotic agents (herbicide toxicity, salt injury, excess irrigation, etc.). Root distribution is uniform throughout the soil mix or growth media and growth is typical for the species/cultivar. Appendix I B. CROWN 1. Central Leader: Trees shall have a single, relatively straight central leader and tapered trunk, free of codominant stems and vigorous, upright branches that compete with the central leader. If the original leader has been headed, a new leader at least ½ (one–half) the diameter of the original leader shall be present. Maintaining a single, centeral leader is preferable. Heading and retaining a leader is acceptable. Heading without retaining a leader is unacceptable. Appendix I 2. Main Branches (scaffolds): Branches should be distributed radially around and vertically along the trunk, forming a generally symmetrical crown typical for the species. a) Main branches, for the most part, shall be well spaced. preferable unacceptable preferable unacceptable b) Branch diameter shall be no greater than 2/3 (two thirds) the diameter of the trunk, measured 1" (one inch) above the branch. preferable unacceptablepreferable unacceptable c) The attachment of scaffold branches shall be free of included bark. preferable unacceptable preferable unacceptable Appendix I 3. Temporary branches: Temporary branches should be present along the lower trunk, particularly for trees less than 1–1/2" (one and one–half inches) in trunk diameter. They should be no greater than 3/8" (three–eighths inch) in diameter. Heading of temporary branches is often necessary to limit their growth. Good Not as Good C. TRUNK 1. Trunk diameter and taper shall be sufficient so that the tree will remain vertical without the support of a nursery stake. 2. The trunk shall be free of wounds (except properly–made pruning cuts), sunburned areas, conks (fungal fruiting–bodies), wood cracks, bleeding areas, signs of boring insects, galls, cankers and/or lesions. 3. Trunk diameter at 6" (six inches) above the soil surface shall be within the diameter range shown for each container size below: Container Size Trunk Diameter (inches) # 5 (gallon) ....................... 0.5" to 0.75" # 15 (gallon) .................... 0.75" to 1.5" 24 inch box ....................... 1.5" to 2.5" # 15 (gallon) ............0.75" to 1.5" 24 inch box .............1.5" to 2.5" 36 inch box .............2.5" to 3.5" 48 inch box .............3.5" to 4.5" Appendix I D. ROOTS 1. The trunk, root collar (root crown) and large roots shall be free of circling and/or kinked roots. Soil removal near the root collar may be necessary to inspect for circling and/or kinked roots. 2. The tree shall be well rooted in the soil mix. When the container is removed, the rootball shall remain intact. When the trunk is carefully lifted both the trunk and root system shall move as one. preferable preferable unacceptable 3. The upper–most roots or root collar shall be within 1" (one inch) above or below the soil surface. preferable unacceptable unacceptable Appendix I 4. The rootball periphery should be free of large circling and bottom–matted roots. The acceptable diameter of circling peripheral roots depends on species and size of rootball. The maximum acceptable size should be indicated for the species (if necessary). preferable unacceptable E. MOISTURE STATUS At time of inspection and delivery, the rootball shall be moist throughout. The crown shall show no signs of moisture stress as indicated by wilted, shriveled or dead leaves or branch dieback. The roots shall show no signs of excess soil moisture conditions as indicated by poor root growth, root discoloration, distortion, death or foul odor. V. INSPECTION The buyer reserves the right to reject trees that do not meet specifications as set forth in these guidelines or as specified by the buyer. If a particular defect or substandard element or characteristic can be easily corrected, appropriate remedies shall be re- quired. If destructive inspection of a rootball(s) is to be done, the buyer and seller should have a prior agreement as to the time and place of inspection, minimum num- ber of trees or percentage of a species or cultivar to be inspected and financial respon- sibility for the inspected trees. DELIVERY The buyer should stipulate how many days prior to delivery that notification is needed. Appendix I GLOSSARY: Codominant – Two or more vigorous and upright branches of relatively equal size that originate from a common point, usually where the leader has been lost or removed. Crown – The aboveground part of the tree including the trunk. Cultivar – A named plant selection from which identical or nearly identical plants can be produced, usually by vegetative propagation or cloning. Girdling root – A root that partially or entirely encircles the trunk and/or buttress roots, which could restrict growth and downward movement of photo- synthate and/or water and nutrients up. Included bark – Bark embedded within the crotch between a branch and the trunk or between two or more stems that prevents the formation of a normal branch bark ridge. This often occurs in branches with narrow-angled attach- ments or branches resulting from the loss of the leader. Such attachments are weakly attached and subject to splitting out. Kinked root – A primary root(s), which is sharply bent, causing a restriction to water, nutrient, and photosynthate movement. Kinked roots may compro- mise the structural stability of root systems. Leader – The dominant stem which usually develops into the main trunk. Photosynthate – Pertains to sugar and other carbohydrates that are produced by the foliage during photosynthesis, an energy trapping process. Root collar – The flared area at the base of a tree where the roots and trunk merge. Also referred to as the "root crown" or "root flare". Shall – Used to denote a practice that is mandatory. Should – Used to denote a practice that is recommended. Scaffold branches – Large, main branches that form the main structure of the tree. Temporary branch – A small branch that is retained temporarily along the lower trunk of young trees. Temporary branches provide photosynthate to increase trunk caliper and taper and help protect it from sunburn damage and mechanical injury. Such branches should be kept small and gradually removed as the trunk develops. Trunk – The main stem or axis of a tree that is supported and nourished by the roots and to which branches are attached. Appendix I CITY OF SAN LUIS OBISPO PUBLIC WORKS QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM Approved By: Date: ___________________________________ _March 16, 2018____________________ Appendix J QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM City of San Luis Obispo Quality Assurance Program for Construction 1. GENERAL The City of San Luis Obispo’s (City) Quality Assurance Program (QAP) has been developed by the City to provide guidelines for testing of construction materials and assurance that the materials incorporated into the construction projects are in conformance with the contract specifications. The City’s QAP is updated approximately every five years to address changes to project specifications, materials, and updates to the testing methods. The City’s QAP will be used on all City projects off of the National Highway System including those projects which receive federal funds. Regardless of project funding, City projects on the National Highway System will use the QAP developed by the California Department of Transportation (Caltrans). 2. ACCEPTANCE TESTING PROGRAM City staff will typically perform inspection duties on a project. Those duties include verification of compliance with the project’s plans, special provisions, City Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards, and State Standard Specifications and Standard Plans. When testing of construction materials is required, a materials testing consultant is typically used to perform acceptance testing on City projects. 2.1 Materials Laboratory The consultant’s materials laboratory is required to be under the responsibility of a California-registered Civil Engineer with experience in sampling, inspection and testing of construction materials. The laboratory shall certify the results of all tests performed by its personnel under the Engineer’s supervision. The laboratory is required to contain certified test equipment capable of performing the tests conforming to the provisions of this Quality Assurance Program (QAP). The materials laboratory is required to provide documentation that it complies with the following procedures: • Correlation Testing Program – The materials laboratory shall be a participant in one or more of the following testing programs: a. AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory b. Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory c. Caltrans’ Reference Samples Program • Certification of Personnel – The materials laboratory shall employ personnel who are certified by one or more of the following: a. Caltrans District Materials Engineer and/or Caltrans METS IA Representative b. Nationally recognized non-Caltrans organizations such as the American Concrete Institute, National Institute of Certification of Engineering Technologies, etc. c. Other recognized organizations approved by the State of California and/or Recognized by local governments or private associations. Appendix J • Laboratory and Testing Equipment – The materials laboratory shall only use laboratory and testing equipment that is in good working order. All such equipment shall be calibrated at least once each year. All testing equipment must be calibrated by impartial means using devices of accuracy traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology. A decal shall be firmly affixed to each piece of equipment showing the date of the last calibration. Testing equipment calibration decals shall be checked as part of the Independent Assurance Program (IAP). 2.2 Acceptance Testing Acceptance Testing will be performed by certified materials testing personnel utilizing an accredited materials laboratory. The certifications and accreditations shall be specific to the tests being performed. The test results will be used to ensure that all materials incorporated into the project are in compliance with the contract specifications. The City requires compliance with its Standard Specifications on all projects located within the City right-of-way, or on City-owned property. Testing must be in accordance with the Caltrans test methods whenever applicable. When Caltrans test methods are not feasible for a certain test, a national recognized standard (i.e., AASHTO, ASTM, etc.) test method may be utilized. Testing frequencies are to be in accordance with the contract specifications. If not specified in the contract specifications, samples shall be taken at the frequencies specified in the following table: Material Test for:Sample Frequency CTM ASTM Location PCC-Major structures Slump/Penetration 533 C143/C360 Site 1 per day Cylinders 539/540/521 C31 Site 1 set of 3 per day PCC-Curb, Gutter, Slump/Penetration 533 C143/C360 Site 1 per day Sidewalk & Pavement Cylinders 539/540/521 C31 Site 1 set of 3 per project Asphalt Concrete Sieve 202 C136 Site or Plant 1 per project Compaction 375 D2950 Site 1 per 1500 tons Aggregate Base Sieve 202 C136 Site or Plant 1 per project Sand Equivalent 217 - Site or Plant 1 per project Maximum Density 216 D1557 Site or Plant 1 per project Compaction 231 D2922 Site 1 per 500 cu. yds. Disturbed Basement Maximum Density 216 D1557 Site 1 per project Soil or Embankment Compaction 231 D2922 Site 1 per 500 cu. yds. Structure Backfill Sieve 202 C136 Site or Plant 1 per project Maximum Density 216 D1557 Site or Plant 1 per project Compaction 231 D2922 Site 1 per 500 cu. yds. Chain Link Fencing Compliance with gage check -Site 300 feet Specifications Bridge Profilograph Compliance with 547 -Site 1 per bridge Specifications Repeat until pass Test Note: All tests must be performed at a minimum of one test per project, unless otherwise addressed in the in the “Acceptance of Minor Quantities of Materials” sections of this QAP. The following are time periods for reporting material test results to the Resident Engineer: • When the aggregate is sampled at material plants, test results for Sieve Analysis, Sand Equivalent and Cleanness Value should be submitted to the Resident Engineer within 24 hours after sampling. • When materials are sampled at the job site, test results for compaction and maximum density should be submitted to the Resident Engineer within 24 hours after sampling. • When soils and aggregates are sampled at the job site: Appendix J 1. Test results for Sieve Analysis, Sand Equivalent and Cleanness Value should be submitted to the Resident Engineer within 72 hours after sampling. 2. Test results for “R” Value and asphalt concrete extraction should be submitted to the Resident Engineer within 96 hours after sampling. When sampling products such as Portland Cement Concrete (PCC), cement-treated base (CTB), hot mix asphalt (HMA), and other such materials; the time of such sampling will be varied with respect to the time of the day insofar as possible, in order to avoid a predictable sampling routine. The reporting of Acceptance Testing results, if not performed by the Resident Engineer’s staff, shall be done on an expedited basis such as by email or telephone. 2.3 Certificates of Compliance A Certificate of Compliance will also be accepted in lieu of sampling and testing for the following materials, regardless of the quantity of material used on a project. Aluminum Pipe Asphalt Oil Asphaltic Emulsion Concrete Admixtures and Curing Compounds Corrugated Steel Pipe Arches Culvert and Drainage Pipe Joints Electrical Conductors/components Engineering Fabric Epoxy Epoxy Coated Rebar Fiber Lime Lumber and Timber Metal Target Plates Minor Concrete Mulch Paint used for Traffic Striping Pavement Reinforcing Grid Perforated Steel Pipe Plastic Pipe and Tubing Portland Cement PCC Admixtures & Curing Compounds Prefabricated Bridges Preformed Elastomeric Joint Seal Reinforced Concrete Pipe Reinforcing Steel Roofing Shingles Soil Amendments Stabilizing Emulsion Steel Piles Structural Steel Structural Timber and Lumber Temporary Railing (Type K) Timber and Lumber Traffic Signs Treated Timber and Lumber Structural Metal Plate Pipe and Pipe Arches Steel Entrance Tapers, Pipe Down Drains, Reducers, and Coupling Bands Water Valves & Stops Certificates of Compliance shall conform to the requirements of the contract specifications, and shall include the following information: • Project number • Lot number, mill marking, or other identifying information which can trace the material to the precise location of manufacturing. • Statement that the material complies with the contract specification • Signature of the Manufacturer 2.4 Acceptance of Minor Quantities of Materials Minor quantities of construction materials may be accepted based on visual inspection by the Engineer if the source of the material has recently furnished similar materials found to be satisfactory using normal sampling and testing requirements, or if the supplier provided a Certificate of Compliance indicating conformance with the project specifications. The following list provides maximum quantities of materials that may be accepted under these conditions: Appendix J • Aggregates other than for use in Portland Cement Concrete, not to exceed 100 tons per day nor more than 500 tons per project • Bituminous mixtures, not to exceed 50 tons per day nor more than 500 tons per project. • Paint, not to exceed 50 gallons per project. • Masonry items, based on verification of dimensions and uniformity of manufacture. • Grout, not to exceed 1 cubic yard per project. • Mortar, not to exceed 1 cubic yard per project. • Portland Cement Concrete, not to exceed 8 cubic yards per project. • Asphalt Concrete, not to exceed 50 tons per project. 2.5 Testing of Manufactured Materials For those materials manufactured and prefabricated at locations other than the jobsite (generally at the manufacturer’s location) that require testing or inspection, City staff or the City’s materials consultant will perform Source Inspection on such materials. 2.6 City-Owned Testing Equipment The City maintains the following testing equipment for use by City staff: Equipment Maintenance Frequency Slump Cone Visual Check for Damage Annually Kelly Ball Visual Check for Damage Annually 3. PROJECT CLOSEOUT 3.1 Project Certification Upon completion of a Federal-aid project, a “Materials Certificate" will be completed and signed by the Resident Engineer utilizing Exhibit 17-G in the Local Assistance Procedures Manual. The Agency will include this “Materials Certificate” in the Report of Expenditures submitted to the Caltrans District Director, Attention: District Local Assistance Engineer. A copy of the “Materials Certificate” shall also be included in the City’s project files. All materials incorporated into the work which did not conform to specifications must be explained and justified on the “Materials Certification”. 3.2 Records Project construction files shall be organized and indexed, and will include the following items: 1. Copy of Quality Assurance Plan 2. Independent Assurance Certs. of Proficiency-Testers and Samplers (Ex. 16-D TL-0111) Cert. of Accreditation of Testing Lab (TL-0113) Equipment Calibration Verifications (Nuclear Gauge, etc…) 3. Notice of Material to be Used (Ex. 16-I) 4. Acceptance Testing Results and Initial Tests: (Make a Category for each material) Summary Log of Acceptance Testing Test Results/Reports 5. Certificates of Compliance 6. Records for Source Inspection of structural pre-manufactured material. (collected inspection tags) 7. Buy America Certifications 8. Materials Certification (Ex. 17-G) The project files shall be available for at least three years following the date of final project voucher. The use of a “Testing Summary Log” facilitates reviews of material sampling and testing by Caltrans and FHWA, and assists the Resident Engineer in tracking the frequency of testing. Appendix J City of San Luis Obispo, Public Utilities, 879 Morro Street, San Luis Obispo, CA, 93401-2710, 805.781.7215, slocity.org Revised January 1, 2017 Temporary Industrial Waste Discharge Permit Application SITE INFORMATION Site Name (DBA) Site Address Site Owner/Contact Phone PROPERTY OWNER Property Owner Phone CONTRACTOR/CONSULTANT INFORMATION Contractor/Consultant Mailing Address Contact Title Phone Office Fax Cell Address (if different than above) Emergency contact Emergency Phone DISCHARGE INFORMATION Discharge Description Location/Description of point of Discharge Appendix K Revised January 1, 2017 DISCHARGE INFORMATION (Continued) Estimated Discharge Amount (gallons per hour) Total Daily Note: If daily discharge is over 10,000 gallons, a Significant Industrial User Permit will be required. This permit may have Federal requirements. Contact this office for more information. Flow Rate Method of Flow Regulation Time of Discharge Days of Operation Hours PRETREATMENT Description of Pretreatment (attach diagram of pretreatment unit) Pollutants of Concern (attach additional sheets as needed) Batch Treatment or Continuous Required attachments  Site map (show all buildings, streets, pretreatment unit, discharge location).  Diagram of pretreatment unit.  Lab analysis of wastewater to be treated and discharged may be required. Signature Date Appendix K Revised January 1, 2017 CONSTITUENT LIMIT (mg/L) Ammonia 32 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)226 Chloride 1523 Sodium 1200 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) 2215 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) 2346 Copper 0.14 Zinc 0.17 Appendix K Encroachment Permit/CIP Holiday Restriction Area Per City Council Resolution 9487 (2003 Series) Appendix L RESOLUTION NO. 9487 (2003 SERIES) A RESOLUTION OF THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF SAN LUIS OBISPO APPROVING POLICY REGARDING CITY CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS AND RIGHT OF WAY ENCROACHMENT IN THE DOWNTOWN AREA WHEREAS, it is essential to maintain and upgrade City infrastructure in order to provide reliable municipal services and to maintain a healthy local economy; and WHEREAS, construction impacts associated with vehicular lane closures, traffic detours, or materials delivery can be disruptive to the flow of traffic in the downtown area and affect access for consumers to the downtown retail core, and WHEREAS, most businesses and residents are willing to accept a level of inconvenience, provided that projects are coordinated and managed carefully, and that the need for a project is understood; and WHEREAS, the Downtown Association (DA) has requested certain enhancements in the coordination of capital projects in the downtown core, and in the level of communication between the City and the DA regarding project purpose and status; and WHEREAS, there exists a time period between Thanksgiving and New Year's Day that is critical to the success of Downtown merchants and businesses; and WHEREAS, the City Council for the City of San Luis Obispo adopted City Council Resolution 7068 (1992 Series), titled: POLICY FOR THE IMPROVED COORDINATION AND COMMUNICATION IN THE COMPLETION OF CITY CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED, that the City Council of the City of San Luis Obispo does hereby rescind Resolution 7068 (1992 Series) and sets forth the following policy to be followed in the completion of capital improvement projects and the issuance of Encroachment Permits in the downtown area and, as appropriate, elsewhere in the community: 1) Unless necessary for emergency access or maintenance, construction activities which affects City Streets in the Downtown area shall not occur between Thanksgiving and New Year's Day and shall be restricted by the Public Works Department through the project specifications and through the Encroachment Permit Process.. 2) For purposes of this policy the Downtown area shall be defined as the area defined by the Downtown Association boundary. R 9487 Appendix L Resolution No. 9487 (2003 Series) Page 2 3) The Public Works Director shall have discretion in allowing long -term permanent construction equipment to remain during this period (such as pedestrian barricades or long -term lane closures as part of large scale projects) when it is not feasible to remove such equipment or its removal is considered more disruptive than allowance in the public right -of -way. 4) Capital Improvement Projects Specific Requirements a) The City will provide ample notification to businesses and residents, either directly or through its contractors, regarding planned capital improvement projects, particularly those planned in the downtown area; and b) All reasonable steps will be taken by the City staff to ensure ample communication and coordination relative to planned City projects (non — emergency) in the downtown, including: i) A minimum of 30 day notification to the DA prior to construction; ii) The preparation of project "fact sheets" for the DA to fully explain project purpose and other important information; iii) Participation in quarterly " project coordination meetings" with the DA and the utility companies; iv) Attending or conducting community meetings and/or forums and making presentations for larger complex projects when requested by the DA, or as determined by staff; v) Assurance that project specifications require adequate contractor responsibility for notification, signage, and procedures to minimize impacts on affected businesses to the extent feasible; and c) DA shall be responsible for communicating with its membership regarding project plans and status following receipt of project information from the City; and d) The City staff will make every effort to ensure that: i) All involved staff members share and communicate accurate information; and ii) That projects managed by different departments are properly coordinated. Appendix L Resolution No. 9487 (2003 Series) Page 3 On motion of Council Member Settle, seconded by Vice Mayor Mulholland and on the following roll call vote: AYES -- Council Members Ewan, Schwartz and Settle, Vice Mayor Mulholland and Mayor Romero NOES: None ABSENT: None the foregoing Resolution was passed and adopted this 7u' day of October, 2003. MW =4 City Clerk . APPROVED AS TO FORM: Jon P. Lowell, City Attomey Appendix L